RX-V1800_G-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 6:13 PM
G
RX-V1800
© 2007
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia
WK69330
RX-V1800
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.
vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press A MASTER ON/OFF to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the
main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC
power plug from the AC wall outlet.
En
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:
................................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by A MASTER ON/OFF. In
this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
Note
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus
may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be
connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
This symbol mark is according to the
EU directive 2002/96/EC.
This symbol mark means that electrical
and electronic equipment, at their endof-life, should be disposed of separately
from your household waste.
Please act according to your local rules
and do not dispose of your old products
with your normal household waste.
Contents
Notice ....................................................................... 2
Features ................................................................... 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 4
Getting started ........................................................ 5
Quick start guide .................................................... 6
Connections ........................................................... 12
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening
room ................................................................... 37
Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 37
BASIC OPERATION
Advanced sound configurations...........................64
Changing sound field parameter settings................. 64
Selecting decoders ................................................... 69
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP).........72
Using SET MENU................................................... 76
1 BASIC MENU...................................................... 77
2 VOLUME MENU ................................................ 81
3 SOUND MENU.................................................... 82
4 INPUT MENU...................................................... 85
5 OPTION MENU................................................... 88
Saving and recalling the system settings
(SYSTEM MEMORY)......................................93
Saving the current system settings........................... 93
Loading the stored system settings .......................... 94
Using examples........................................................ 95
Remote control features........................................97
Basic procedure ....................................................... 42
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT).............................................. 43
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 43
Using your headphones............................................ 43
Muting the audio output........................................... 44
Displaying the input source information
(SIGNAL INFO) ................................................. 44
Playing video sources
in the background of an audio source.................. 45
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 45
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 97
Setting remote control codes ................................... 99
Programming codes from other remote controls ... 101
Changing source names in the display window..... 102
Macro programming features ................................ 103
Clearing configurations ......................................... 106
Using multi-zone configuration..........................108
Advanced setup....................................................113
Using the advanced setup menu ............................ 113
Using audio features ............................................. 52
FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 54
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 54
Manual tuning.......................................................... 54
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 55
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 55
Selecting preset stations........................................... 56
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 57
APPENDIX
(at the end of this manual)
Front Panel ...............................................................i
Remote Control ...................................................... ii
Sound output in each sound field program......... iii
List of remote control codes ...................................v
Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 58
Selecting the Radio Data System program type
(PTY SEEK mode) .............................................. 59
Using the enhanced other networks
(EON) data service .............................................. 60
Using iPod™.......................................................... 61
Controlling iPod™................................................... 61
Recording .............................................................. 63
1 En
English
“A MASTER ON/OFF” or “1 DVD” (example) indicates
the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control.
Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at the end of this
manual for the information about each position of the parts.
APPENDIX
Radio Data System tuning
(Europe model only) ......................................... 58
Troubleshooting...................................................117
Resetting the system............................................124
Glossary................................................................125
Sound field program information......................129
Parametric equalizer information .....................130
Specifications .......................................................131
Index .....................................................................133
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 52
Adjusting the tonal quality....................................... 52
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 53
Enjoying multi-channel sources
in 2-channel stereo............................................... 53
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 108
Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 109
Sound field programs ........................................... 46
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 46
Sound field program descriptions............................ 46
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 51
BASIC
OPERATION
Playback ................................................................ 42
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
NOTICE
Notice
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote
control. In case the button names differ between the front
panel and the remote control, the button name on the
remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
• “AMASTER ON/OFF” or “1 DVD” (example)
indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the
remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or the pages at
the end of this manual for the information about each
position of the parts.
• The symbol “☞ ” with page number(s) indicates the
corresponding reference page(s).
• The shape of the illustration (for example, speaker
terminals, input/output jacks, AC outlets, etc.) in this
manual may vary depending on the model.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535
& other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a
registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and
DTS-HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
iPodTM
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo, and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
2 En
FEATURES
Features
iPod™ controlling capability
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 130 W + 130 W
Center: 130 W
Surround: 130 W + 130 W
Surround back: 130 W + 130 W
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod
(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound
fields
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to
that of a high-quality multi-channel source playback
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
Digital audio decoders
◆ Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder
◆ DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
decoder
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx
decoder
◆ DTS NEO:6 decoder
Sophisticated FM/AM tuner
◆
◆
◆
◆
40-station random and direct preset tuning
Automatic preset tuning
Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
Radio Data System capability (Europe model only)
Other features
◆ YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multichannel input
◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from
480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability includes
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
◆ Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability
◆ Adaptive DSP effect level controlling capability
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning and
macro capability
◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS
◆ SYSTEM MEMORY capability for saving and recalling
multiple system parameter settings
◆ Sleep timer
INTRODUCTION
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or
high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio
based on HDMI version 1.3a
◆ Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
information capability
◆ Deep Color video signal (30/36 bits) transmission capability
◆ High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability
◆ High definition digital audio format signals capability
◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion
(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI
digital video) capability for monitor out
◆ Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or
480p/576p to 720p, 1080i or 1080p
English
3 En
Features
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following accessories.
Remote control
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
STANDBY
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control
(except Europe model)
POWER
Batteries (6)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
(except Europe model)
POWER
TUNER
CD
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
STANDBY
CD-R
SELECT
BD/HD DVD PHONO
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
SOURCE
TV MUTE
LEVEL
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
TV
MUTE
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PRESET
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
(Europe model)
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
ENTER
MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
3
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
5
7
6
4
MOVIE
ID1 ID2
8
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
+ 10
ENT
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
REC
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
Speaker terminal wrench
Power cables
(Two for Asia model)
Indoor FM antenna
Note
The form of the supplied accessories varies depending on the models.
4 En
Optimizer microphone
AM loop antenna
GETTING STARTED
Getting started
Notes
1
Press the
part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2
Insert the four supplied batteries
(AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
– the transmit indicator (O) does not flash or its light becomes
dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code
and program any acquired functions that may have been
cleared.
3
Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
2
1
3
■ Installing batteries in the Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control (Except Europe model)
1
3
2
INTRODUCTION
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
Caution
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE
plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet.
Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may
cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire
hazard.
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or
counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight
slot screwdriver.
Voltages are as follows:
AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
Take off the battery compartment cover.
2
Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03,
UM-4) according to the polarity markings
(+ and –) on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3
Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
230240V
Voltage indication
English
1
5 En
QUICK START GUIDE
Quick start guide
The following steps describe the easiest way to enjoy DVD movie playback in your home theater.
Video monitor
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
Preparation: Check the items
Subwoofer
Surround right
speaker
In these steps, you need the following supplied
accessories.
❏ AM loop antenna
❏ Indoor FM antenna
❏ Power cable
Center
speaker
Surround back
right speaker
DVD player
Surround back left
speaker
Surround left
speaker
Step 1: Set up your speakers
☞ P. 7
The following items are not included in the package of this
unit.
❏ Speakers
❏ Front speaker ..................................... x 2
❏ Center speaker ................................... x 1
❏ Surround speaker .............................. x 4
Select magnetically shielded speakers. The
minimum required speakers are two front speakers.
The priority of the requirement of other speakers is
as follows:
1. Two surround speakers
2. One center speaker
3. One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
❏ Active subwoofer ................................... x 1
Select an active subwoofer equipped with an RCA
input jack.
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
☞ P. 8
Step 3: Turn on the power and
start playback
☞ P. 10
Enjoy DVD playback!
6 En
❏ Speaker cable ......................................... x 7
❏ Subwoofer cable ..................................... x 1
Select a monaural RCA cable.
❏ DVD player .............................................. x 1
Select DVD player equipped with coaxial digital
audio output jack and composite video output
jack.
❏ Video monitor .......................................... x 1
Select a TV monitor, video monitor or projector
equipped with a composite video input jack.
❏ Video cable ............................................. x 2
Select RCA composite video cables.
❏ Digital coaxial audio cable .................... x 1
Quick start guide
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel
(R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly.
Step 1: Set up your speakers
Front speakers and center speaker
Loosen
HDMI
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
BD/HD DVD
A BD/HD DVD B DVD C DTV/CBL
Y
DVD
DTV/CBL
IN
Insert
INTRODUCTION
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
Tighten
ANTENNA
DVR
OUT
IN
VCR
OUT
MONITOR OUT
Y
FM
75Ω UNBAL.
AC IN
AM
GND
S VIDEO
IN4
PB
PB
PR
PR
IN
DVR
VIDEO
OUT
(REC)
(PLAY)
SP1
MD/
R
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
R
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
+
L
TAPE
SPEAKERS
L
WRENCH
HOLDER
+
IN3
IN
REMOTE
OUT
R
DTV/
CBL
PHONO
GND
IN2
L
DVD
R
CD
CD-R
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
+
ZONE 3
OUT(REC)
AUDIO
+
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SB(8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
DOCK
L
SINGLE
CENTER
+
+
AC OUTLETS
R
IN(PLAY)
IN1
CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND
SURROUND
SP2
L
+
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
R
SUR.BACK/
PRE OUT
PRESENCE
L
ZONE OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
Speaker terminal wrench
+
BD/
HD DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
1 CD
OUT
2 DVD
3 DVR
4 CD
1
5 BD/
HD DVD 6 DVD
7 DTV/
CBL
8 CD-R
9 MD/
TAPE
R
+
FRONT
L
+
2
TRIGGER OUT
RS-232C
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
Speaker terminals
1
Place your speakers and subwoofer in the
room.
2
Connect speaker cables to each speaker.
To the front right
speaker
To the front left
speaker
To the center
speaker
Surround and surround back speakers
3
Connect each speaker cable to the
corresponding speaker terminal of this unit.
To the surround
back right
speaker
1
2
3
4
To the surround
right speaker
4
1 Make sure that this unit and the subwoofer are
unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the speaker cables
together to prevent short circuits.
3 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other.
4 Do not let the bare speaker wires touch any metal
part of this unit.
To the surround
back left
speaker
To the surround
left speaker
Connect the subwoofer cable to the
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack of this unit and
the input jack of the subwoofer.
Subwoofer
AV receiver
Input jack
Subwoofer cable
7 En
English
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Quick start guide
Step 2: Connect your DVD player
and other components
DVD VIDEO
2
Connect the video cable to the composite
video output jack of your DVD player and the
DVD VIDEO jack of this unit.
VIDEO MONITOR OUT
AV receiver
DVD player
HDMI
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
BD/HD DVD
A BD/HD DVD B DVD C DTV/CBL
Y
Y
PB
PB
DVD
DTV/CBL
IN
ANTENNA
DVR
OUT
IN
VCR
OUT
MONITOR OUT
FM
75Ω UNBAL.
AC IN
AM
GND
S VIDEO
IN4
IN
DVR
(PLAY)
PR
PR
VIDEO
OUT
(REC)
SPEAKERS
SP1
MD/
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
R
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
+
L
TAPE
R
L
WRENCH
HOLDER
+
IN3
IN
REMOTE
OUT
R
DTV/
CBL
PHONO
GND
IN2
L
DVD
R
CD
CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND
CD-R
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
+
ZONE 3
OUT(REC)
AUDIO
+
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
+
SP2
L
+
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
R
SUR.BACK/
SUB
WOOFER
SB(8CH)
PRE OUT
MULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
DOCK
CENTER
+
AC OUTLETS
R
IN(PLAY)
IN1
L
SINGLE
PRESENCE
L
ZONE OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
+
BD/
HD DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
1 CD
OUT
2 DVD
3 DVR
4 CD
1
5 BD/
HD DVD 6 DVD
7 DTV/
CBL
8 CD-R
9 MD/
TAPE
R
+
FRONT
L
+
DVD VIDEO jack
2
TRIGGER OUT
RS-232C
Composite video
output jack
Video cable
DVD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL
3
Make sure that this unit and the DVD
player are unplugged from the AC
wall outlets.
1
Connect the video cable to the VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jack of this unit and the video
input jack of your video monitor.
Video monitor
AV receiver
Connect the digital coaxial audio cable to the
digital coaxial audio output jack of your DVD
player and the DVD DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack of this unit.
DVD player
Digital coaxial
audio output
jack
Digital coaxial audio
cable
AV receiver
DVD DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL jack
y
• When you connect a component that has only a SCART
jack, use an appropriate converter. The connection
between a converter and this unit depends on signals that
are available on the converter. For details, refer to the
instructions of your converter.
• This unit cannot transmit RGB signals.
8 En
Video input jack
Video cable
VIDEO MONITOR
OUT jack
Quick start guide
4
Connect the supplied AM loop antenna and
indoor FM antenna to this unit.
Connect the supplied power cable to this unit
and then plug the power cable and other
components into the AC wall outlet.
y
• This unit is equipped with AC OUTLET(S) that provide(s)
power to other components (except Korea model). See
page 32 for details.
• (Asia model only) Select one of the supplied power cables
suitable for the type of AC wall outlet in your location
before plugging this unit into the AC wall outlet.
Indoor FM antenna
INTRODUCTION
AM loop antenna
5
For further connections
• Using other kinds of speaker combinations ☞ P. 14
• Connecting a video monitor via various ways of
connection
☞ P. 24
• Connecting a DVD player via various ways of
connection
☞ P. 25
Note
The types of the supplied indoor FM antenna and the FM
antenna terminal of this unit are different depending on the
models.
Connecting the wire of the AM loop antenna
Press and hold
the tab
Insert
• Connecting a DVD recorder or a digital video
recorder
☞ P. 27
☞ P. 27
• Connecting a set-top box
• Connecting a CD player, an MD recorder, or a
turntable
☞ P. 28
Release the tab
☞ P. 29
• Connecting an external amplifier
• Connecting a DVD player via multi-channel analog
audio connection
☞ P. 30
y
The wire of the AM loop antenna does not have any polarity
and you can connect either end of the wire to AM or GND
terminal.
Assembling the supplied AM loop antenna
• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock
☞ P. 31
• Using the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
☞ P. 31
• Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel
☞ P. 31
• Connecting an outdoor FM/AM antenna
☞ P. 32
General connection information
• General information on jacks and cable plugs
☞ P. 20
• General information on HDMI
• Speaker impedance setting
☞ P. 21–22
☞ P. 33
English
9 En
Quick start guide
Step 3: Turn on the power and start
playback
Check the type of the connected speakers.
If the speakers are 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER
IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see
page 33). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front
speakers (see page 113).
1
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2
Press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position on the front panel.
4
Start playback of the desired DVD on your
player.
5
Rotate Q VOLUME to adjust the volume.
■ After using this unit...
Press B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to
the standby mode.
3
Rotate the C INPUT selector to set the input
source to “DVD”.
y
• The recommended sound field program is set for each
input source (DVD, etc.). You can also use various sound
field programs and other sound modes for playback. Refer
to the following pages for details:
– see pages 46 to 50 to use various sound field programs
– see page 51 to turn on or off the sound effect
– see page 52 to use the Pure Direct mode for high
fidelity sound
• You can also set the input source to “TUNER” to use the
FM/AM tuning feature. For information on the FM/AM
tuning, see pages 54 to 57.
10 En
This unit is set to the standby mode and consumes a small
amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from
the remote control. To turn on this unit from the standby
mode, press B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel
(or 8 POWER on the remote control). See page 33 for
details.
Quick start guide
What do you want to do with this unit?
• Basic operations of this unit
☞ P. 42
• Enjoying FM/AM radio programs
☞ P. 54
• Enjoying Radio Data System programs
☞ P. 58
• Using your iPod with this unit
☞ P. 61
Using various sound features
• Using various sound field programs
☞ P. 46
• Using the Pure Direct mode for high fidelity sound
☞ P. 52
• Adjusting the tonal quality of the speakers
☞ P. 52
• Customizing the sound field programs
☞ P. 64
Manually adjusting various parameters
of this unit
• Setting the basic speaker configuration
☞ P. 77
• Adjusting the balance of the speaker levels ☞ P. 79
• Setting the distance of each speaker
☞ P. 80
• Setting the parameters related to the volume level
☞ P. 81
• Adjusting the tonal quality by using the graphic
equalizer
☞ P. 82
• Adjusting the lip sync function for the HDMI
connection
☞ P. 84
• Assigning the input/output jacks of this unit
☞ P. 86
Adjusting the parameters of this unit
• Setting the parameters of the front panel display or
OSD
☞ P. 88
• Automatically optimizing the speaker parameters for
your listening room (AUTO SETUP)
☞ P. 37
• Setting the parameter related to the video signals
☞ P. 89
• Setting the remote control
☞ P. 97
• Protecting the various settings
☞ P. 90
• Setting the parameters of the multi-zone feature
☞ P. 91
Additional features
• Displaying the current input source signal
information in the OSD
☞ P. 44
Adjusting the advanced parameters
• Saving and recalling the system settings of this unit
(SYSTEM MEMORY)
☞ P. 93
• Setting the speaker impedance of the connected
speakers
☞ P. 113
☞ P. 43
• Setting the parameters of this unit to default values
☞ P. 116
• Using headphones
• Using this unit in multiple rooms simultaneously
(multi-zone configuration)
☞ P. 108
• Automatically turning off this unit
INTRODUCTION
Using various input sources
☞ P. 45
English
11 En
Connections
Rear panel
1
2
HDMI
3
4
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
BD/HD DVD
A BD/HD DVD B DVD C DTV/CBL
Y
Y
PB
PB
PR
PR
5
DVD
DTV/CBL
IN
6
7
ANTENNA
DVR
OUT
IN
VCR
OUT
MONITOR OUT
FM
75Ω UNBAL.
AC IN
AM
GND
S VIDEO
IN4
IN
DVR
(PLAY)
VIDEO
OUT
(REC)
SP1
MD/
R
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
R
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
+
L
TAPE
SPEAKERS
L
WRENCH
HOLDER
+
IN3
IN
REMOTE
OUT
R
DTV/
CBL
PHONO
GND
CD
CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND
CD-R
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
+
ZONE 3
L
SINGLE
CENTER
+
+
AC OUTLETS
IN2
L
DVD
R
R
IN(PLAY)
IN1
OUT(REC)
AUDIO
+
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SB(8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
DOCK
PRESENCE
+
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
R
L
ZONE OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
+
BD/
HD DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
1 CD
OUT
2 DVD
3 DVR
4 CD
1
8
9
Name
5 BD/
HD DVD 6 DVD
7 DTV/
CBL
8 CD-R
9 MD/
TAPE
R
+
L
FRONT
+
2
TRIGGER OUT
0
RS-232C
A
B
Page
1
HDMI jacks
2
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
3
Audio component jacks
28
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
31, 108
4
Video component jacks
24 – 27
5
ANTENNA terminals
32
6
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
32
7
AC IN
32
AC OUTLET(S)
32
8
DOCK terminal
31
9
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks
25
B
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
30
PRE OUT jacks
29
ZONE OUT jacks
108
Speaker terminals
16
WRENCH HOLDER
18
12 En
SP2
L
SURROUND
SUR.BACK/
PRE OUT
21
24 – 27
0 TRIGGER OUT jacks
These are control expansion terminals for custom installation.
A RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult
your dealer for details.
Connections
Placing speakers
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy the CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
■ 7.1-channel speaker layout
7.1-channel speaker layout is highly recommended to play back the sound of high definition digital audio formats (Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.) as well as the conventional audio sources with sound field programs. See page 16
for connection information.
y
C
FR
FL
FR
30˚
SW
FL
SR
60˚
SL
80˚
SBL
SR
SBR
SBL
C
SL
PREPARATION
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See page 46 for
details.
SL
SR
SBR
1.8 m (6 ft)
30 cm (12 in) or more
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the
ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a
center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds.
Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the high fidelity
sound of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in bitstreams and multi-channel PCM sources. The position of
the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer
near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.
English
13 En
Connections
■ 6.1-channel speaker layout
■ 5.1-channel speaker layout
See page 17 for connection information.
See page 17 for connection information.
y
y
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the
effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See
page 15 for details.
We recommend that you also add the presence speakers for the
effect sounds of the CINEMA DSP sound field program. See
page 15 for details.
FR
FR
SW
FL
SR
SB
C
SW
FL
SR
C
SL
SL
1.8 m (6 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
C
C
FR
FL
FR
FL
30˚
SL
30˚
SR
SL
SR
60˚
SL
60˚
80˚
SR
SL
80˚
SR
SB
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
Center speaker (C)
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
Subwoofer (SW)
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as
those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 13).
Surround back speaker (SB)
Connect a single surround speaker to the SURROUND
BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals and place the single
surround back speaker behind the listening position. The
surround back left and right channel signals are mixed
down and output at the single surround back speaker when
you set “SUR.B L/R SP” to “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see
page 78).
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
Center speaker (C)
Subwoofer (SW)
The functions and settings of each speaker are the same as
those for the 7.1-channel speaker layout (see page 13).
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND
speaker terminals even if you place the surround speakers
behind the listening position.
For the smooth and unbroken sound field behind the
listening position, place the surround left and right
speakers farther back compared with the placement in the
7.1-channel speaker layout.
The surround back channel signals are directed to the
surround left and right speakers when “SUR.B L/R SP” is
set to “NONE” (see page 78).
For other speaker combinations
You can enjoy multi-channel sources with sound field programs by using a speaker combination other than the 7.1/6.1/5.1-channel
speaker combinations.
Use the automatic setup feature (see page 37) or set the “SPEAKER SET” parameters in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 72) to
output the surround sounds at the connected speakers.
14 En
Connections
■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field
programs (see page 46). We recommend that you use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA DSP sound field
programs. To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to SP1 speaker terminals and then set “PRESENCE SP” to
“YES” (see page 78).
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
PL
FL
FR
PREPARATION
1.8 m (6 ft)
PR
1.8 m (6 ft)
C
Note
You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit
automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field
programs. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PRIORITY” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 79).
English
15 En
Connections
Connecting speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
this unit cannot reproduce the input sources accurately.
Caution
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 33).
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could
damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the
speakers away from the monitor.
• If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” before using this unit (see
page 33). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers (see page 113).
Notes
• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the
plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
• You can use the SP1 terminals to connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers as well as the presence speakers (see page 108).
• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. This unit
automatically switches the presence speakers and surround back speakers depending on the input sources and the selected sound field
programs. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PRIORITY” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 79).
■ For the 7.1-channel speaker setting
Subwoofer
Surround back speakers
Left
Right
Presence speakers
Left
Right
Center speaker
SP1
R
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
R
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
+
+
R
+
SUB
WOOFER
SPEAKERS
L
+
L
SINGLE
SURROUND
CENTER
+
+
SP2
L
+
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
R
L
PRE OUT
+
R
+
FRONT
L
+
Zone 2 or Zone 3
speakers
(see page 108)
Left
Right
Surround speakers
Left
Right
Front speakers
16 En
Connections
■ For the 6.1-channel speaker setting
Surround back speaker
Subwoofer
Presence speakers
(see pages 15 and 16)
SPEAKERS
SP1
R
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
R
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
+
+
L
+
L
SINGLE
CENTER
+
+
SP2
L
SURROUND
+
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
L
R
PRE OUT
+
R
+
L
FRONT
+
Zone 2 or Zone 3
speakers
(see page 108)
PREPARATION
R
+
SUB
WOOFER
Center speaker
Left
Right
Surround speakers
Left
Right
Front speakers
■ For the 5.1-channel speaker setting
Subwoofer
Front speakers for the
bi-amplification
connections
(see page 19)
Presence speakers
(see pages 15 and 16)
SP1
R
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
R
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
+
+
R
+
SUB
WOOFER
Center speaker
SPEAKERS
L
+
L
SINGLE
SURROUND
CENTER
+
+
SP2
L
+
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
R
L
PRE OUT
+
R
+
FRONT
L
+
Zone 2 or Zone 3
speakers
(see page 108)
Left
Right
Surround speakers
English
Left
Right
Front speakers
17 En
Connections
■ Connecting the speaker cable
5
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the
cable together to prevent short circuits.
Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto
WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this
unit when not in use.
10 mm (0.4 in)
2
Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker
terminal wrench.
Speaker terminal wrench
■ Connecting to the SP2 speaker
terminals
Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals (see
page 108).
1
Open the tab.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
3
4
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
2
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the
terminal.
3
Close the tab to secure the wire.
Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the
supplied speaker terminal wrench.
18 En
Connections
■ Connecting the banana plug
(Except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea
models)
1
Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker
terminal wrench.
Speaker terminal wrench
■ Using bi-amplification connections
Caution
Remove the shorting bars or bridges of your speakers to
separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter)
crossovers.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
2
This unit
Insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
R
+
L
SINGLE
+
R
SURROUND
L
R
FRONT
L
+
PREPARATION
This unit allows you to make bi-amplification connections
to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support biamplification connection.
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT
and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP speaker terminals as
shown below. To activate the bi-amplification connections,
set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see
page 116).
+
Banana plug
+
+
y
You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker terminals.
Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the
terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug.
Right
Left
Front speakers
Note
When you make the conventional connection with the speakers,
make sure that the shorting bars are put into the terminals of the
speakers appropriately. Refer to the instruction manuals of the
speakers for details.
English
19 En
Connections
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Video jacks and cable plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
L
R
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
(White)
(Red)
(Orange)
L
R
AUDIO
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
C
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(Yellow)
O
V
S
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Y
PB
PR
Component
video cable
plugs
■ Audio jacks
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connect the video
input jacks of this unit to the video output jacks of the
input source components to switch the audio and video
sources simultaneously. Connection depends on the
availability of input jacks on your video monitor.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
Note
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are
compatible with up to 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
20 En
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
y
This unit is equipped with the video conversion function. See
pages 23 and 89 for details.
Connections
Information on HDMI™
This unit has four HDMI input jacks and one HDMI output jack for digital audio and video signal input/output. Connect
the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3, or HDMI IN 4 jack of this unit to the HDMI output jack of other HDMI
components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI input jack of other HDMI
components (such as a TV and a projector).
The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of the selected input source are output at the HDMI OUT jack of
this unit.
PREPARATION
This HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standards:
• HDMI Version 1.3a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.3a) licensed by HDMI
Licensing, LLC.
• HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
Note
You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 44).
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
HDMI
■ Default input assignment of HDMI input
jacks
HDMI input jack
HDMI cable plug
Assigned input source
IN1
BD/HD DVD
IN2
DVD
y
IN3
DTV/CBL
• We recommend that you use a commercially available HDMI
cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo
printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
IN4
DVR
Notes
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt
playback or cause noise.
• The HDMI OUT jack outputs the audio signals input at the
HDMI input jacks only even if “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to
“OTHER” (see page 85).
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the
HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to
establish the connection to the component.
• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video
and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be
output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”
in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 89) to activate this feature.
English
21 En
Connections
■ HDMI signal compatibility with this unit
Audio signals
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
media
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, etc.
DSD
2/5.1ch,
2.8224 MHz,1 bit
SACD, etc.
Bitstream
Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High
definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD,
Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master
Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution
Audio
Blu-ray Disc,
HD DVD, etc.
y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio
signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio
sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the
following connections:
– multi-channel analog audio input (see page 30)
– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source
component, and set the component appropriately.
Notes
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video
and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of
the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input
source component appropriately so that the component outputs
the audio bitstream signals directly (does not decode the
bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied
instruction manuals for details.
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features
(for example, the special audio contents downloaded via the
Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play
back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD
contents.
22 En
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the
following resolutions:
Video signal format
– 480i/576i
– 480p/576p
– 720p
– 1080i
– 1080p
Refresh rate
– 59.94(60)/50 Hz
This unit also accepts 30 or 36-bit Deep Color video
signals.
Connections
Audio and video signal flow
■ Audio signal flow
Input
■ Video signal flow
Input
Output
Output
HDMI
HDMI
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
PREPARATION
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
S VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
Digital output
Through
Analog output
Video conversion ON (see page 89)
Notes
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS signals input at one of the HDMI input jacks can be output
at the HDMI OUT jack only when “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set
to “OTHER” (see page 85).
• The following types of audio signals can be only input at HDMI
input jacks:
– DSD
– Dolby TrueHD
– Dolby Digital Plus
– DTS-HD Master Audio
– DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
y
You can deinterlace and convert the resolution of the video
signals by using “VIDEO SET” parameters. See page 89 for
details.
Notes
• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT
VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the
input signals is as follows:
1. COMPONENT VIDEO
2. S VIDEO
3. VIDEO
• Digital video signals input at the HDMI input jacks cannot be
output from analog video output jacks.
• The analog component video signals (with 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) of resolution only) are converted to the S-video or
composite video signals and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT jacks.
• The analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution
are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks.
• The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT and VCR OUT
jacks and is not recorded.
English
23 En
Connections
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.
Notes
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
y
You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on
the rear panel of this unit. Use the “SUPPORT AUDIO”
parameter in “SOUND MENU” to select the component to play
back HDMI audio signals (see page 85).
HDMI
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI
connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals
being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the
HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.
• Set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see
page 89) to display the short message displays and sound field
parameter displays.
• The “SET MENU” and sound field parameter displays appear
with the gray background depending on the input video signal
format and the setting of the parameters in “DISPLAY SET”
(see page 88).
• If the connected video monitor is compatible with the automatic
audio and video synchronization feature (automatic lip sync
feature), this unit adjusts the audio and video timing
automatically (see page 84). Connect the video monitor to the
HDMI OUT jack of this unit to use the feature.
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
Y
S VIDEO
PB
VIDEO
PR
OUT
Y
PB
V
PR
Component video in
Video in
S-video in
HDMI in
TV
(or projector)
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
24 En
S
Connections
Connecting other components
Make sure that this unit and other
components are unplugged from the
AC wall outlets.
Notes
PREPARATION
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 89), be sure
to make the same type of video connections as those made for
your TV (see page 24). For example, if you connected your TV
to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your
other components to the VIDEO jacks.
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 89), the
converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT
jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type
of video connections between each component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the
default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for
“OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O
ASSIGNMENT” (see page 86).
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL and the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jacks, priority
is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL
jack.
• The short message displays do not appear when the component
video signals with 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions
are input.
■ Connecting a Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player
Connect your Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD player to the HDMI IN 1 jack of this unit to perform the features of the Blu-ray
Disc or HD DVD completely.
Blu-ray Disc or
HD DVD player
HDMI out
Component out
Audio out
S-video out
Y
HDMI
PB
Optical out
PR
Video out
S
L
V
R
O
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
BD/HD DVD
A BD/HD DVD
Y
S VIDEO
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
R
IN1
DIGITAL INPUT
BD/
HD DVD
OPTICAL
5 BD/
HD DVD
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
English
25 En
Connections
■ Connecting a DVD player
DVD player
HDMI out
Optical out
Coaxial out
Audio out
Component out
S-video
out
C
HDMI
Y
PB
PR
Video out
L
V
S
R
O
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
DVD
B DVD
Y
S VIDEO
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
R
IN2
DVD
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
2 DVD
6 DVD
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
26 En
Connections
■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
Note
* When you connect another VCR to this unit, connect it to the VCR terminals (S VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN, AUDIO IN, S VIDEO OUT,
VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks) same as DVR terminals except the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
*
VIDEO
HDMI
IN
DVR
OUT
IN
VCR
OUT
S VIDEO
IN4
VIDEO
DVR
L
PREPARATION
R
DVR
IN
OUT
DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL
3 DVR
L
V
S
S-video in
R
Video in
R
Audio in
L
Audio out
V
Video out
S
S-video out
Coaxial out
HDMI out
C
DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
■ Connecting a set-top box
HDMI out
Satellite receiver,
cable TV receiver or HDTV
decoder
Optical out
Component out
S
V
L
R
Audio out
PR
Video out
HDMI
PB
S-video out
Y
O
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
DTV/CBL
C DTV/CBL
Y
S VIDEO
PB
VIDEO
PR
L
IN3
R
DTV/
CBL
DIGITAL INPUT
English
OPTICAL
7 DTV/
CBL
27 En
Connections
■ Connecting audio components
Notes
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.
• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a lowoutput MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.
• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL jack and the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack to an audio component, the
priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL jack.
Audio out
L
Optical in
R
O
Audio in
L
R
IN
(PLAY)
CD recorder
OUT
(REC)
MD/
L
TAPE
R
PHONO
GND
CD
CD-R
L
R
IN(PLAY)
OUT(REC)
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
1 CD
R
L
R
O
Audio in
L
9 MD/
TAPE
MD recorder or
tape deck
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
28 En
Optical in
O
Audio out
CD player
C
Optical out
R
Coaxial out
L
Audio out
Ground
Turntable
R
Audio out
L
8 CD-R
4 CD
Connections
■ Connecting an external amplifier
This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output
or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks.
Notes
•
•
•
•
•
When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.
Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer unit.
Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “SPEAKER SET” (see page 77).
You can use the automatic setup feature even if you use an external amplifier (see page 37).
2
CENTER
FRONT
3
4
PREPARATION
1
SURROUND SINGLE(SB)
L
R
SUR.BACK/
SUB
PRESENCE
WOOFER
PRE OUT
5
1 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
2 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
3 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
4 SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks
Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When
you only connect one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack.
y
• Set the “SUR.B L/R SP” to “LRGx2”, “LRGx1”, “SMLx2” or
“SMLx1” and “PRESENCE SP” to “NONE” (see page 78) to
output the surround back channel signals at the SUR.BACK/
PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.
• Set the “PRESENCE SP” to “YES” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to
“NONE” (see page 78) to output the presence channel signals at
the SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.
• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” (see page 19), this unit output
the front channel audio signals at the SUR.BACK/PRESENCE
PRE OUT jacks.
5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.
English
29 En
Connections
■ Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or
pre-amplifier.
If you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH” in “MULTI CH” (see page 87), you can use the input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in
“MULTI CH” together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
Notes
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 43), this unit automatically
turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
• When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected as the input source, only the signals input at
MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are output from the connected headphones.
For 6-channel input
For 8-channel input
(
CENTER
FRONT(6CH) SURROUND
)
(
C)
MD/
L
TAPE
L
*
R
R
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
FRONT(6CH) SURROUND
SB(8CH)
L
MULTI CH INPUT
L
L
R
R
R
Surround
out
SUB
SB(8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
R
L
R
L
R
Front out
Center out
Subwoofer
out
Surround out
L
Surround back out
Front out
Center out
Subwoofer
out
SUB
WOOFER
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Note
* The analog audio input jacks assigned as “FRONT” in
“MULTI CH” (see page 85).
30 En
Connections
■ Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal
dock
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), where you
can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod
using the supplied remote control. Connect a Yamaha iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) to
the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its
dedicated cable.
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit.
Caution
Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other
components before making connections.
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
PURE DIRECT
DOCK
PREPARATION
Note
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
SLEEP
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
ON
OFF
MASTER
Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10,
sold separately)
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L
S
V
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
R
O
■ Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Optical output
Infrared signal
receiver or
Yamaha
component
Audio
output
Remote
control out
IN
Video output
REMOTE
S-Video output
When the components are the Yamaha products and have
the capability of the transmission of the remote control
signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT
jack to the remote control input and output jack with the
monaural analog mini cable as follows. See page 108 for
more details of this feature.
Game console or
video camera
OUT
Remote
control in
Yamaha
component
(CD or DVD
player, etc.)
English
31 En
Connections
Connecting the FM and AM
antennas
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated
terminals. In general, these antennas should provide
sufficient signal strength.
Connecting the power cable
■ Connecting the AC power cable
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after
all other connections are complete, then plug the AC
power cable into an AC wall outlet.
Notes
AC IN
• (Asia and General models only) Be sure to set the tuner
frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area
(see page 116).
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
To the AC wall outlet
AC OUTLETS
AM loop
antenna
(supplied)
Note
ANTENNA
FM
75Ω UNBAL.
GND
AM
(Asia model only) Select on of the supplied power cables suitable
for the type of AC wall outlet in your location before plugging
this unit into the AC wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft)
vinyl-covered wire extended
outdoors from a window.
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum
interference, connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth ground. A good
earth ground is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet
Korea model............................................................... None
Other models......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to
these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For
information on the maximum power or the total power
consumption of the components that can be connected to
these outlet(s), see “Specifications” on page 131.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
32 En
Connections
Setting the speaker impedance
Caution
If you are to use 6-ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER
IMP.” to “6Ω MIN” as follows BEFORE using this
unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front
speakers.
Turning this unit on and off
■ Turning on this unit
Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
When you turn on this unit by pressing A MASTER ON/
OFF, the main zone is turned on.
y
Make sure this unit is turned off.
When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few
seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.
2
Press and hold O STRAIGHT on the front
panel and then press A MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
■ Turning off this unit
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
again to release it outward to the OFF position to
turn off this unit.
PREPARATION
1
Notes
While holding
down
MASTER
3
Rotate the N PROGRAM selector to select
“SPEAKER IMP.”.
4
Press O STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“6Ω MIN”.
5
Press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to save the new
setting and turn off this unit.
Note
• B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as
8 POWER and 7 STANDBY on the remote control are
operational only when A MASTER ON/OFF is pressed
inward to the ON position.
• Basically, we recommend that you use the standby mode to turn
off this unit.
■ Set the main zone to the standby mode
Press B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or 7 STANDBY)
to set the main zone to the standby mode.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
■ Turning on the main zone from the
standby mode
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.
Press B MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or 8 POWER) to
turn on the main zone.
y
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a delay for a few
seconds before this unit can reproduce sound.
• These buttons are operational only when A MASTER ON/
OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.
If there are some problems...
• First, turn off and then turn on this unit again.
• If problems persist, initialize the parameters of this
unit. See page 124 for details.
English
33 En
Connections
Front panel display
1
3
2
V-AUX
DOCK
4
VCR
DVR DTV/CBL
DVD
BD/HD DVD MD/TAPE
5
CD-R
CD
PHONO
TUNED STEREO
AUTO MEMORY
PS
ZONE2 PTY
96/24
L C R ZONE3 RT
CT
LFE SL SB SR
SLEEP EON
VOLUME MUTE
96 q DIGITAL PLUS
24 q PL x q EX
MASTER AUDIO q TRUE HD
See page 35 for details.
TUNER
dB
VIRTUAL HiFi DSP
DSD YPAO ENHANCER SILENT
CINEMA
PCM MATRIX DISCRETE
HD
MULTI CH
SBL
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
SBR
PTY HOLD
TUNED STEREO
AUTO MEMORY
PS
ZONE2 PTY
ZONE3 RT
CT
SLEEP EON
PTY HOLD
1 HDMI indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is
input at one of the HDMI input jacks (see page 21).
8 Input channel and speaker indicators
2 DOCK indicator
Lights up when you station your iPod in a Yamaha iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit
(see page 31).
Input channel indicators
3 Battery charge indicator
Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the
stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit (see
page 61).
4 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
5 MUTE indicator and VOLUME level indicator
• Indicates the current volume level.
• The MUTE indicator flashes while the MUTE function
is on (see page 44).
6 Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
7 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
34 En
Presence speaker indicators
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
SBL SBR
Input channel indicators
• Indicate the channel components of the current
digital input signal.
• Light up or flash according to the settings of the
speakers when this unit is in the auto setup
procedure (see page 37) or the speaker level setting
procedure in the “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see
page 79).
Presence speaker indicators
Light up according to setting for “PRESENCE SP”
(see page 78) in “SPEAKER SET” when this unit is in
the auto setup procedure (see page 37) or the speaker
level setting procedure in the “SPEAKER LEVEL”
(see page 79).
y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back
speakers automatically by running “AUTO SETUP” (see
page 37) or manually by adjusting settings for “PRESENCE
SP” (see page 78) and “SUR.B L/R SP” (see page 78) in
“SPEAKER SET”.
Connections
9 Tuner indicators
Lights up when this unit is in the FM or AM tuning mode.
TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station
(see page 54).
STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal
for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator
is lit (see page 54).
CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound
field program (see page 46).
HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 46).
VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 51).
F Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active sound fields (see page 46).
MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show that a station can be stored
(see page 55).
G ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
turned on (see page 50).
0 ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators
Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on
(see page 109).
A SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 45).
B Radio Data System indicators
(Europe model only)
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
PREPARATION
AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning
mode (see page 54).
E DSP indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the sound
field programs are selected.
H Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 43).
I SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 51).
J Decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit function.
PS, PTY, RT and CT
Light up according to the selected Radio Data System
display mode.
EON
Lights up when the EON data service is being
received.
VIRTUAL HiFi DSP
C
D
DSD
PCM
YPAO ENHANCER SILENT
CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE
HD
96 q DIGITAL PLUS
24 q PL x q EX
MASTER AUDIO q TRUE HD
E
F
G
H
I
J
C YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run “AUTO SETUP” and when the
speaker settings set in “AUTO SETUP” are used without
any modifications (see page 37).
English
D Input signal indicators
Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct
Stream Digital) or PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital
audio signals.
35 En
Connections
Using the remote control
Notes
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Remote control sensor
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
30
30
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following
conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 99.
Opening and closing the front
panel door
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel
door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of
the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these
controls.
Display window (A)
Shows the name of the selected input source that you can
control.
Infrared window (P)
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
Transmit indicator (O)
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
Operation mode selector (C)
The function of some buttons depends on the operation
mode selector position.
AMP
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input
selector button (see page 98).
TV
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or
PHONO (see page 97).
36 En
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
This unit employs the YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome
listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer
microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment.
The following menu screen appears on the video
Using AUTO SETUP
monitor.
AUTO SETUP
Notes
You can also run “AUTO SETUP” using the system menu
that appears in the front panel display. When you connect
the optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack, the
following display appears in the front panel display. This
manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the “AUTO
SETUP” procedure.
y
• The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold.
• Before performing operations, set the operation mode selector
on the remote control to C AMP.
AUTO SETUP
ENTER TO START
■ Basic procedure of the automatic setup
1
2
AUDIO
SELECT
Make sure of the following check points
before starting the AUTO SETUP operations.
❏ Speakers are connected appropriately.
❏ Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
❏ This unit and the video monitor are turned on.
❏ The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume
level is set to about half way (or slightly less).
❏ The crossover frequency controls of the
connected subwoofer is set to the maximum.
❏ If you use the external amplifiers (see page 29),
the amplifiers are turned on and the settings are
appropriate.
❏ The room is sufficiently quiet.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
“MIC ON” and “View OSD Menu” appears in the
front panel display.
TONE
CONTROL
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
SLEEP
EDIT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
p
[
y
PREPARATION
SETUP;;;;;;;;;AUTO
WIRING;;;;;;;CHECK
DISTANCE;;;;;CHECK
SIZE;;;;;;;;;CHECK
EQ;;;;;;;;;NATURAL
LEVEL;;;;;;;;CHECK
. START
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Start
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the “AUTO SETUP” procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
• We recommend that you get out of the room while this unit is in
the automatic setup procedure. Keep quiet when you leave the
room. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this unit to complete
the automatic setup procedure.
3
Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
Optimizer microphone
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would
be when you are seated in your listening position. You can
use the attached screw of a tripod (etc.) to fix the optimizer
microphone to the tripod (etc.).
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
English
Omni-directional
microphone
37 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
The results displayed under “RESULT” are as follows.
4
Press 3 ENTER to start the setup
procedure.
This unit starts the automatic setup procedure. Loud
test tones are output from each speaker during the
automatic setup procedure. Once all items are set, the
result display appears in the OSD.
Number of speakers SP
Displays the number of speakers connected to this
unit in the following order:
Front/Back/Subwoofer
Speaker distance DIST
Displays the speaker distance from the listening
position in the following order:
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
Notes
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any
operation on this unit. If you perform any operation while
this unit is in the automatic setup procedure, “E-9:USER
CANCEL” appears in the OSD. In such cases, select
“RETRY” to restart the automatic setup procedure.
• We recommend that you get out of the room while this unit
is in the automatic setup procedure. Keep quiet when you
leave the room. It takes approximately 3 minutes for this
unit to complete the automatic setup procedure.
Speaker level LVL
Displays the speaker output level in the following
order:
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output
level
Notes
The display changes as follows.
• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears during the testing
procedure, restart from step 2.
• If an error occurs during the automatic setup procedure,
the setup procedure is canceled and an error screen
appears. For details, see “If an error screen appears” on
page 41.
• When this unit detects potential problems during the
automatic setup procedure, “WARNING” and the number
of warning messages appears in the above of “RESULT”
(see page 41).
• Depending on the listening environment, “SWFR
PHASE:REV” appears during the automatic setup
procedure and “SUBWOOFER PHASE” in “SOUND
MENU” (see page 79) is automatically set to
“REVERSE”.
AUTO SETUP
p
[
SETUP;;;;;;;;;AUTO
WIRING;;;;;;;CHECK
DISTANCE;;;;;CHECK
SIZE;;;;;;;;;CHECK
EQ;;;;;;;;;NATURAL
LEVEL;;;;;;;;CHECK
. START
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Start
AUTO SETUP
INITIALIZING
. PRE CHECK
MAIN CHECK
EQUALIZING
LEVEL
[
||||||||;;;;;;;;;;
[ ] : EXIT
5
Press 3 ENTER to display the setup results
in detail.
AUTO SETUP
SP :
5/4/0.1
DIST:
3.60/4.30m
LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB
>SET
CANCEL
SP :
5/4/0.1
DIST:
3.60/4.30m
LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB
>SET
CANCEL
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Detail
p
. RESULT
. RESULT
[
AUTO SETUP
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Detail
RESULT
WIRING
FRONT L;;;;;OK
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Return
38 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
6
Press 3 l / h repeatedly to toggle between
the setup result displays.
8
Press 3 l / h to select “SET” or “CANCEL”.
AUTO SETUP
Results of the speaker
connection and wiring
RESULT
SP :
5/4/0.1
DIST:
3.60/4.30m
LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB
.
>SET
CANCEL
Results of the speaker distance
from the listening position
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
Result of the speaker detection
and size
9
Press 3 ENTER to confirm your selection.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
PREPARATION
Choices: SET, CANCEL
• Select “SET” to confirm the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the “AUTO SETUP”
results.
SET MENU
Results of the parametric
equalizer of each speaker
. ;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;SYSTEM MEMORY
;SIGNAL INFO
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
Results of the speaker output
level
10
y
• Press 3 k / n to toggle between the parameters in a
results.
• If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually
adjust each parameter, run “MANUAL SETUP” (see
page 72).
Press F SET MENU to exit from “SET
MENU”.
Notes
• After you have completed the automatic setup procedure, be
sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away
from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit.
Notes
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of
your listening environment, run “AUTO SETUP” again to
recalibrate your system.
• The distances displayed in the “DISTANCE” results may
be longer than the actual distance depending on the
characteristics of your subwoofer or external amplifiers if
you connect them.
• In the “EQUALIZING” results, different values may be set
for the same band to provide finer adjustments.
Press 3 ENTER to return to the top result
display.
AUTO SETUP
English
RESULT
SP :
5/4/0.1
DIST:
3.60/4.30m
LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB
.
>SET
CANCEL
p
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
[
7
SYSTEM MEMORY feature
You can save multiple result of the automatic setup by using
the SYSTEM MEMORY feature. See page 93 for details.
39 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
■ Customizing the measurements
Parametric equalizer type EQ
Parametric equalizer adjusts the level of the specified
frequency bands. This unit automatically selects the
crucial frequency bands for the listening room and
adjusts the level of the selected frequency bands to
create a cohesive sound field in the room. You can
select the type of the parametric equalizer adjustment
from the following choices.
Choices: NATURAL, FLAT, FRONT, SKIP
• Select “NATURAL” to average out the frequency
response of all speakers with higher frequencies
being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT
setting sounds a little harsh.
• Select “FLAT” to average the frequency response
of all speakers. Recommended if all of your
speakers are of similar quality.
• Select “FRONT” to adjust the frequency response
of each speaker in accordance with the sound of
your front speakers. Recommended if your front
speakers are of much higher quality than your other
speakers.
• Select “SKIP” to skip this item and perform no
adjustments.
You can select the parametric equalizer type, and activate
or deactivate each check items.
1
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to this unit and place the microphone
appropriately.
Refer to the steps 1 to 3 of “Basic procedure of the
automatic setup” on page 37.
2
Press 3 k repeatedly to select “SETUP” and
then press 3 l / h to select the desired
setting.
Choices: AUTO, RELOAD
• Select “AUTO” to automatically run the entire
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
• Select “RELOAD” to reload the last “AUTO
SETUP” settings and override the current settings.
When you select “RELOAD”, the previous auto
setup result appears in the OSD. See step 4 on
page 38 and carry out the operations.
Notes
Volume level LEVEL
Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.
Choices: CHECK, SKIP
• Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust
this item.
• Select “SKIP” to skip this item and perform no
adjustments.
• “RELOAD” is available only when you have previously
run “AUTO SETUP” and confirmed the results.
• If you selected “RELOAD” in step 2, no test tones are
output and the result of the previous automatic setup
appears in the OSD.
3
Press 3 k / n repeatedly to select “WIRING”,
“DISTANCE”, “SIZE”, “EQ”, or “LEVEL” and
then press 3 l / h to select the desired
setting.
This unit performs the following checks:
Speaker wiring WIRING
Checks which speakers are connected and the
polarity of each speaker.
Speaker distance DISTANCE
Checks the distance of each speaker from the
listening position and adjusts the timing of each
channel.
Speaker size SIZE
Checks the frequency response of each speaker and
sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each
channel.
Choices: CHECK, SKIP
• Select “CHECK” to automatically check and adjust
the item.
• Select “SKIP” to skip the item and perform no
adjustments.
40 En
4
After the setting of the measurement, start
the automatic setup procedure.
Refer to steps 4 to 6 of “Basic procedure of the
automatic setup” on page 38 for details.
SYSTEM MEMORY feature
You can save multiple result of the automatic setup by using
the SYSTEM MEMORY feature. See page 93 for details.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room
■ If an error screen appears
1
Press 3 l / h to select “RETRY” or “EXIT” and
then press 3 ENTER.
The following display is an example where “E-9:USER
CANCEL” appears in the OSD.
Make sure the pointer is pointing at
“WARNING” and then press 3 ENTER to
display the detailed information about the
warning.
The number on the right of “WARNING” indicates
the number of warning messages.
ERROR
E-9:USER CANCEL
Don't operate
any function
AUTO SETUP
WARNING 2
. RESULT
.
>RETRY
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Enter
Choices: RETRY, EXIT
• Select “RETRY” to retry the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
• Select “EXIT” to exit from the “AUTO SETUP”
procedure.
2
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Detail
Press 3 l / h repeatedly to toggle between
the warning displays.
y
PREPARATION
SP :
5/4/0.1
DIST:
3.60/4.30m
LVL : -10.0/+5.0dB
>SET
CANCEL
EXIT
WARNING
• If “E-5:NOISY” appears in the OSD, you can also select
“PROCEED” and let this unit continue the automatic setup.
However, we recommend that you perform the automatic setup
procedure again for more accurate adjustment.
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Reverse channel
FL
--CENTER
--PR
SL
--SBL
--[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Return
ERROR
E-5:NOISY
Keep silent
y
• For details about each warning message, refer to the
“AUTO SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on
page 123.
• When the corresponding warning message is not
applicable to a speaker, “–––” is displayed instead.
• If the volume level setting of the connected subwoofer is
too high or low, “TOO LOUD” (the volume level setting is
too high) or “TOO LOW” (the volume level setting is too
low) is displayed in the “W-3:LEVEL ERROR” display.
Adjust the volume level setting of the connected
subwoofer appropriately.
. >RETRY EXIT PROCEED
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Enter
• If “E-10:INTERNAL ERROR” appears in the OSD, you can
select only “EXIT”.
• For details about each error message, refer to the “AUTO
SETUP” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 123.
■ If “WARNING” appears
When this unit detects potential problems during the
automatic setup procedure, “WARNING” appears in the
result display. Check the warning messages to correct your
speaker settings.
WARNING
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
--FR
CENTER
PL
----SR
--SBL
SWFR:TOO LOUD
[p]/[[]: Select
Return
[ENTER]:
Note
Warnings differ from errors in that warnings do not cancel the
“AUTO SETUP” procedure.
3
Press 3 ENTER to return to the top result
display.
y
The adjustment are made even if “WARNING” appears, however
the adjustment may not be optimal.
English
41 En
Playback
Caution
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play
back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player,
you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player
supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound
output level of your CD player before you play back a
CD encoded in DTS.
3
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the instruction manuals for the source
component.
• See page 54 for details about FM/AM tuning
instructions.
4
Rotate Q VOLUME (or press B VOLUME +/–)
to adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
Control range: MUTE, –80.0 dB (minimum) to
+16.5 dB (maximum)
y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio
connection, set “DECODER MODE” in “INPUT MENU” to
“DTS” before the playback (see page 86).
y
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to C AMP.
See page 53 to adjust the level of each speaker.
5
Basic procedure
1
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Rotate the N PROGRAM selector (or press
one of the sound field program selector
buttons (N) repeatedly) to select the desired
sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display and in the OSD. See
page 46 for details about sound field programs.
y
Currently selected sound field program category
• See page 44 to display the input source information.
• You can display a gray background in the OSD when there
is no video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK”
in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 88).
• You can turn on or off the short message displays on the
video monitor. See pages 88 for details.
Movie
Sci-Fi
Currently selected sound field program
2
Rotate the C INPUT selector (or set the
operation mode selector to C AMP and then
press one of the input selector buttons (1))
to select the desired input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for
a few seconds.
Available input sources
V-AUX
VCR
DVR DTV/CBL
DVD
BD/HD DVD MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER
BD/HD DVD
Currently selected input
source
42 En
Note
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source (see page 43).
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• To display information about the currently selected input source
in the OSD, see page 44 for details.
Playback
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this
feature (audio input jack select) to switch the input jack
assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are
assigned to an input source.
y
• We recommend that you set the audio input jack select setting to
“AUTO” in most cases.
• You can adjust the default audio input jack select setting of this
unit by using “AUDIO SELECT” in “OPTION MENU” (see
page 91).
1
Press D AUDIO SELECT (or 9 AUDIO SEL)
repeatedly to select the desired audio input
jack select setting.
VCR
DVR DTV/CBL
DVD
BD/HD DVD MD/TAPE
A.SEL:
CD-R
CD
PHONO
y
Use “MULTI CH” menu in “INPUT MENU” to set the
parameters for “MULTI CH” (see page 85).
Note
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source.
Using your headphones
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
Available input sources
V-AUX
Rotate the C INPUT selector on the front panel
to select MULTI CH (or press 1 MULTI CH IN).
MULTI CH
BASIC
OPERATION
2
Rotate the C INPUT selector (or press one
of the input selector buttons (1)) to select
the desired input source.
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 30) as the input
source.
TUNER
AUTO
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
Currently selected audio input
jack select setting
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
SLEEP
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
ON
OFF
MASTER
AUTO
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) HDMI
(2) Digital signals
(3) Analog signals
HDMI
Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI
signals are not input, no sound is output.
COAX/OPT
Automatically selects input signals in the
following order:
(1) Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack.
(2) Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is output.
ANALOG
Selects only analog signals. If no analog
signals are input, no sound is output.
Note
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode
activates automatically (see page 51).
Notes
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• When the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks of this unit is selected as the input source, only the signals
input at the MULTI CH INPUT FRONT jacks are output from
the connected headphones.
• All digital multi-channel audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
English
This feature is not available when no digital input jack
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,
HDMI is not available as an audio input jack select setting when
the HDMI input jacks are not used. Use “I/O ASSIGNMENT” in
“INPUT MENU” to reassign the respective input jack (see
page 86).
y
43 En
Playback
Muting the audio output
■ Audio information
FORMAT
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to
analog input.
SAMPLING
The number of samples per second taken from
a continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
y
CHANNEL
• You can also rotate Q VOLUME on the front panel or press
B VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio
output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE”
parameter in “VOLUME MENU” (see page 81).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
The number of source channels in the input
signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a
multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front
channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
BITRATE
The number of bits passing a given point per
second.
DIALOG
The dialogue normalization level preset to the
current input bitstream signal (see page 125).
FLAG
Flag data encoded in the bitstream, or PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically
switch decoders (“Surround EX”, etc.).
Press D MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press D MUTE again to resume
the audio output.
Displaying the input source
information (SIGNAL INFO)
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1
;AUTO SETUP
• “–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding
information.
• Some high definition audio bitstream contents may not include
the discrete surround back left and right channel signals but are
encoded at the bitrate of 192 kHz.
• Even if you make settings to output bitstreames directly, some
players convert the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus
bitstreams to the Dolby Digital bitstreams, while converting the
DTS-HD Master Audio or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
bitstreams to the DTS bitstreams.
;SYSTEM MEMORY
;SIGNAL INFO
■ Video information
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP
and then press F SET MENU on the remote
control.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
SET MENU
. ;MANUAL SETUP
3
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
2
Press 3 n repeatedly to select “SIGNAL
INFO” and then press 3 ENTER.
The audio information about the input source appears
in the OSD.
Press 3 l / h to toggle between the audio
and video information displays.
y
The information is also appears in the front panel display.
Press 3k / n repeatedly to change the displayed
information.
4
Press F SET MENU on the remote control
again to exit from “SET MENU”.
44 En
Notes
HDMI SIGNAL
Type of the source video signals and
the video signals output at the HDMI
OUT jack of this unit.
HDMI RES.
Resolution of the input signal (analog
or HDMI) and the output signal
(HDMI).
ANALOG RES.
Resolution of the source video signals
and the analog video signals output at
the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT
jacks of this unit.
HDMI ERROR
(HDMI MESSAGE)
Error message for HDMI sources or
connected HDMI devices. See
page 120 for details.
Note
“–––” appears when this unit cannot display the corresponding
information.
Playback
Playing video sources in the
background of an audio source
3
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press L SLEEP (or 0 SLEEP) repeatedly to
set the amount of time.
Each time you press L SLEEP (or 0 SLEEP), the
front panel display changes as shown below.
SLEEP 120min.
SLEEP OFF
Press the input selector buttons (1) on the
remote control to select a video source and then
an audio source.
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
SLEEP 90min.
SLEEP 30min.
SLEEP 60min.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching
the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep
timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front
panel display, and the display returns to the selected
sound field program.
Audio sources
SLEEP
120min.
SLEEP
y
STRAIGHT
Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the
desired setting to select the default background video input source
of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 87).
BASIC
OPERATION
Flashes
Video sources
SLEEP
Lights up
Using the sleep timer
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 32).
1
2
■ Cancelling the sleep timer
Press L SLEEP (or 0 SLEEP) repeatedly until
“SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display.
SLEEP OFF
Rotate the CINPUT selector (or press one
of the input selector buttons (1)) to select
the desired input source.
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the instruction manual for the source
component.
• See page 54 for details about FM/AM tuning
instructions.
Disappears
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing B MAIN
ZONE ON/OFF (or 7 STANDBY) to set the main zone to the
standby mode.
English
45 En
Sound field programs
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing
(DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
• The Yamaha CINEMA DSP sound field programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Surround, Dolby TrueHD and
DTS-HD Master Audio sources.
• The Yamaha HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from
the front, back, left and right.
• You can change sound field parameters. See page 64 for details.
Selecting sound field programs
Rotate the N PROGRAM selector (or set the
operation mode selector to C AMP and then
press one of the sound field selector buttons (N)
repeatedly).
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
Notes
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with the corresponding input
source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 43) or when this unit is in the Pure Direct
mode (see page 52).
• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field
program, this unit applies the selected program without
activating the DTS 96/24 decoder.
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to
48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.
Sound field program descriptions
y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
Remote control
button
Category of the
program
Name of the
program
MOVIE
Sci-Fi
Created sound
fields
CINEMA DSP
or
HiFi DSP
MOVIE
8
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.
You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and
background music.
SUR.
DSP LEVEL
P.INIT. DLY
P.ROOM SIZE
S.INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
Available sound field parameters (see page 66)
Sound field indicators
Presence sound field
Listening position
Surround left
sound field
Surround back sound field
46 En
Surround right
sound field
SB INIT. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALOG LIFT
Program description
Sound field programs
■ For audio music sources
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 52), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 51) or
surround decode mode (see page 69).
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
5
7
CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich
HiFi DSP
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal
standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is
at the center left of the arena.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
5
7
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
CLASSICAL
DIALOG LIFT
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
5
7
CLASSICAL
DIALOG LIFT
Hall in Amsterdam
HiFi DSP
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2200 around the circle stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
5
7
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
CLASSICAL
DIALOG LIFT
Church in Freiburg
BASIC
OPERATION
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
HiFi DSP
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the
high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself
reproduces the atmosphere of the church.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
CLASSICAL
5
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
CLASSICAL
REV.DELAY
REV. LEVEL
DIALOG LIFT
Chamber
HiFi DSP
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are
suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
LIVE/CLUB
6
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
LIVE/CLUB
REV.DELAY
REV. LEVEL
DIALOG LIFT
Village Vanguard
HiFi DSP
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage
located in the corner.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
LIVE/CLUB
6
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
LIVE/CLUB
DIALOG LIFT
Warehouse Loft
HiFi DSP
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
REV. LEVEL
DIALOG LIFT
English
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
47 En
Sound field programs
LIVE/CLUB
6
LIVE/CLUB
Cellar Club
HiFi DSP
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the
listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
LIVE/CLUB
6
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
LIVE/CLUB
DIALOG LIFT
The Roxy Theatre
HiFi DSP
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left
of the hall.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
LIVE/CLUB
6
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
LIVE/CLUB
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
REV. LEVEL
DIALOG LIFT
The Bottom Line
HiFi DSP
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in
a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
DIALOG LIFT
■ For various sources
Note
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
ENTERTAIN
7
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts,
the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an
optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
ENTERTAIN
7
P. ROOM SIZE
S. INIT. DLY
ENTERTAINMENT
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INIT. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALOG LIFT
Action Game
This sound field is suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per
channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a
clear sense of directions.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
ENTERTAIN
7
P. ROOM SIZE
S. INIT. DLY
ENTERTAINMENT
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INIT. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALOG LIFT
Roleplaying Game
This sound field is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field design
used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the
movie scenes in the game.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
48 En
P. ROOM SIZE
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INIT. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALOG LIFT
Sound field programs
■ For visual sources of music
Note
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
6
7
ENTERTAINMENT
Music Video
HiFi DSP
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot
live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to
the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
ENTERTAIN
7
P. ROOM SIZE
S. INIT. DLY
ENTERTAINMENT
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INIT. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALOG LIFT
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Opera”
offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of
presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent
beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
P. ROOM SIZE
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INIT. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALOG LIFT
BASIC
OPERATION
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
■ For movie sources
y
You can select the desired decoder (SUR.) used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 71 for details.
Note
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
MOVIE
8
MOVIE
Standard
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel
audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded
by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
SUR.
DSP LEVEL
MOVIE
8
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
MOVIE
S. LIVENESS
SB INIT. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
SB LIVENESS
DIALOG LIFT
Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.
It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very
small to extremely large sound.
SUR.
DSP LEVEL
MOVIE
8
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZE
MOVIE
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INIT. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALOG LIFT
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-featuring movies.
You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and
background music.
SUR.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZE
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INIT. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALOG LIFT
English
49 En
Sound field programs
MOVIE
MOVIE
8
Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.
The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The
reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound.
SUR.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZE
MOVIE
MOVIE
8
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INIT. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALOG LIFT
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear
words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.
SUR.
DSP LEVEL
P. INIT. DLY
P. ROOM SIZE
MOVIE
MOVIE
8
S. INIT. DLY
S. ROOM SIZE
SB INIT. DLY
SB ROOM SIZE
DIALOG LIFT
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater.
The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound
depth.
DSP LEVEL
INIT. DLY
ROOM SIZE
LIVENESS
REV.TIME
REV. LEVEL
REV.DELAY
DIALOG LIFT
■ Stereo playback
STEREO
9
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 53 for details.
DIRECT
STEREO
9
STEREO
7ch Stereo
HiFi DSP
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2
channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties,
etc.
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
PL LEVEL
PR LEVEL
■ Compressed Music Enhancer
ENHANCER
6
MUSIC ENHANCER
Straight Enhancer
Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression artifacts.
EFFECT LEVEL
ENHANCER
6
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.
EFFECT LEVEL
50 En
Sound field programs
■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs without surround
speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the
natural sound field.
When you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 78),
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
you select a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 46).
Before performing the following operation, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to C AMP.
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
Note
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78) in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when this unit is in the “7ch Stereo” mode.
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound through ordinary headphones.
SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you
connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening
to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see
page 46). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
Notes
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 43).
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see
page 52) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 53) is selected, or
when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode.
STRAIGHT
y
The names of the audio signal format of the input source and the
active decoder appear in the front panel display.
■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
Press O STRAIGHT (or H STRAIGHT) to select
“STRAIGHT”.
Press O STRAIGHT (or H STRAIGHT) so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
y
You can also select desired sound field program by rotating the
N PROGRAM selector (or press one of the desired sound field
program buttons (N)) repeatedly.
English
51 En
Using audio features
Before performing the following operation, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to C AMP.
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound
of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is
activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the
least circuitry.
Press M PURE DIRECT (or E PURE DIRECT)
to turn on or off the Pure Direct mode.
The M PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up
and the front panel display automatically turns off while
this unit is in the Pure Direct mode.
Notes
• When this unit is in the Pure Direct mode, this unit does not
output any video signals at the MONITOR OUT jacks and the
HDMI OUT jack.
• When you set the audio input jack select setting to “AUTO”,
“HDMI”, or “COAX/OPT” (see page 43) and play back the
bitstreams or multi-channel PCM sources, this unit activates the
corresponding decoder.
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in
the Pure Direct mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the OSD
– adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters (except for speaker
level settings)
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this
unit is turned off.
y
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation
is performed.
52 En
Adjusting the tonal quality
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front L/R and center speaker channels and the
subwoofer channel.
1
Press E TONE CONTROL on the front
panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency
response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency
response (BASS).
2
Rotate the N PROGRAM selector to adjust
the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or
the low-frequency response (BASS).
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Notes
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and
center speakers and the subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the Pure Direct mode
is activated, or when MULTI CH is selected as the input source.
Using audio features
Before performing the following operation, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to C AMP.
Adjusting the speaker level
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Note
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
“Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room” (see
page 37) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 79).
1
Press 2 LEVEL on the remote control
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.
Press N STEREO on the remote control
repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.
y
• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS
OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 77).
• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the
N PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
• See page 69 for details about the parameters of the “2ch Stereo”
mode.
BASIC
OPERATION
Display
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
2-channel stereo
Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
SUR.R
Surround right speaker
SB R
Surround back right speaker
SB L
Surround back left speaker
SUR.L
Surround left speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
PRNS L
Presence left speaker
PRNS R
Presence right speaker
y
• Once you press 2 LEVEL on the remote control, you can
also select the speaker by pressing 3k / n.
• Instead of “SB R” and “SB L”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR.
B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see
page 78).
2
Press 3 l / h on the remote control to
adjust the speaker output level.
• Press 3 h to increase the value.
• Press 3 l to decrease the value.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
English
53 En
FM/AM tuning
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset
stations with each other.
Note
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.
Automatic tuning
Manual tuning
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1
Rotate the C INPUT selector on the front
panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Note
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
2
Press I FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
1
Rotate the C INPUT selector on the front
panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.
3
Press K TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2
Press I FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3
Press K TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator disappears from the front panel
display.
A FM 97.70MHz
No colon (:)
AUTO
Lights up
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press H PRESET/TUNING to turn
the colon (:) off.
4
Press G PRESET/TUNING l / h once to
begin automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
• Press G h to tune into a higher frequency.
• Press G l to tune into a lower frequency.
54 En
A FM 97.70MHz
No colon (:)
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press H PRESET/TUNING to turn
the colon (:) off.
4
Press G PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune
into the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to continue searching.
FM/AM tuning
Automatic preset tuning
Notes
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in
order. You can then recall any preset station easily by
selecting the preset station number.
1
Rotate the C INPUT selector on the front
panel to select “TUNER” as the input source.
2
Press I FM/AM to select “FM” as the
reception band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
3
Manual preset tuning
Flashes
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
1
Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See page 54 for tuning instructions.
2
Press J MEMORY on the front panel.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 10 seconds.
AUTO MEMORY
MEMORY
Flashes
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
• You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores
FM stations. Press F A/B/C/D/E and then G PRESET/
TUNING l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3 to select
the preset station number under which the first station will be
stored.
• You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store FM
stations automatically. Press H PRESET/TUNING so that the
colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press
G PRESET/TUNING l after pressing and holding
J MEMORY for more than 3 seconds.
BASIC
OPERATION
Press and hold J MEMORY for more than 3
seconds.
The preset station number as well as the AUTO and
MEMORY indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.
A1:FM 97.70MHz
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for
all the available stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning”.
• (Europe model only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting
station are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning.
Flashes
3
Press F A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a
preset station group (A to E) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The selected preset station group letter appears.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
A :FM 97.70MHz
Colon (:)
MEMORY
Flashes
Preset station group
English
55 En
FM/AM tuning
4
Press G PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
• Press G h to select a higher preset station number.
• Press G l to select a lower preset station number.
Selecting preset stations
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
When performing this operation with the remote control, set
the operation mode selector to C SOURCE and then press
1 TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
A1:FM 97.70MHz
Preset station number
5
MEMORY
Press J MEMORY while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
A1:FM 97.70MHz
The displayed station has been stored as A1.
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is
cleared when you store a new station under the same preset
station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
56 En
1
Press F A/B/C/D/E (or 3 A/B/C/D/E l / h)
repeatedly to select the desired preset
station group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
2
Press G PRESET/TUNING l / h (or
3 PRESET/CH k / n) repeatedly to select
the desired preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
Flashes
A1:FM 97.70MHz
FM/AM tuning
Exchanging preset stations
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1
Select preset station “E1” using F A/B/C/D/E
and G PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front
panel.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 56.
2
Press and hold H EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
Flashes
3
Flashes
Select preset station “A5” using F A/B/C/D/
E and G PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
A5:FM 97.70MHz
Flashes
4
MEMORY
BASIC
OPERATION
E1:FM 97.70MHz
MEMORY
Flashes
Press H EDIT again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
EDIT
E1-A5
English
57 En
Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various
Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON
(enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations.
Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using the automatic preset tuning
to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting
stations (see page 55).
• You can also use PTY SEEK mode to tune into the
desired Radio Data System broadcasting station
from the preset ones.
2
Press 6FREQ/TEXT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data
System display mode.
Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data
System information: PS (program service), PTY (program
type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The
corresponding indicators light up in the front panel
display.
Notes
• You can select one of the Radio Data System display modes
only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator
lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this
unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the
station.
• You can select only the available Radio Data System display
modes being offered by the station.
• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit
may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In
particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and
may not be available even when the other Radio Data System
display modes are available.
• In case of poor reception conditions, press KTUNING MODE
on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator disappears from
the front panel display.
• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while
this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception
may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front
panel display.
• When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the
program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric
characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters
are displayed with the “_” (underscore).
• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT
WAIT” appears in the front panel display.
58 En
PS
PTY
RT
CT
Frequency display
• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
• Select “RT” to display the information on the
Radio Data System program currently being
received.
• Select “CT” to display the current time.
Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only)
Selecting the Radio Data System
program type (PTY SEEK mode)
Use this feature to select the desired radio program by
program type from the all preset Radio Data System
broadcasting stations.
4
Press 3 PRESET/CH k / n on the remote
control to select the desired program type.
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
y
Use the automatic preset tuning feature to preset Radio Data
System broadcasting stations (see page 55).
POP M
1
Lights up
2
Program type
Descriptions
NEWS
News
Press 2 BAND repeatedly to select “FM” as
the reception band.
AFFAIRS
Current affairs
INFO
General information
Press 6 PTY SEEK MODE on the remote
control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK
mode.
The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in
the front panel display.
SPORT
Sports
EDUCATE
Education
DRAMA
Drama
CULTURE
Culture
SCIENCE
Science
VARIED
Light entertainment
POP M
Popular music
ROCK M
Rock music
M.O.R. M
Middle-of-the-road music (easylistening)
LIGHT M
Light classics
CLASSICS
Serious classics
OTHER M
Other music
NEWS
Flashes
y
To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press 6PTY SEEK
MODE on the remote control again.
BASIC
OPERATION
3
Set the operation mode selector to
C SOURCE and then press 1 TUNER on
the remote control to select “TUNER” as the
input source.
English
59 En
Radio Data System tuning (Europe model only)
5
Press 6 PTY SEEK START on the remote
control to start searching for all the available
Radio Data System preset stations.
The name of the selected program type flashes and
the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel
display while this unit is searching for stations.
POP M
Flashes
PTY HOLD
Lights up
y
To stop searching for stations, press 6 PTY SEEK START
on the remote control again.
Notes
• This unit stops searching for stations when a station
broadcasting the selected program type is found.
• If the station found is not the one you desire, press 6PTY
SEEK START again to resume searching for another
station broadcasting the same program type.
Using the enhanced other
networks (EON) data service
Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other
networks) data service of the Radio Data System station
network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this
unit automatically searches for all the available preset
stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data
service of the selected program type for a certain duration
of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this
unit automatically switches to the local station
broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back
to the national station once the EON data service ends.
Notes
• You can use this feature only when the EON data service is
available.
• The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only
when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data
System station.
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
2
Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front
panel display.
If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel
display, select another Radio Data System program so
that the EON indicator lights up.
EON
3
Press 6 EON on the remote control
repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data
System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS,
INFO or SPORT).
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
NEWS
Lights up
y
To cancel the EON feature, press 6 EON on the remote
control repeatedly until the name of the program type
disappears and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel
display.
60 En
Using iPod™
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 31), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to enhance the sound quality of the compression
artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 50).
Notes
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote
mode
Controlling iPod™
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as
the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done
with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)
or without it (simple remote mode).
■ Remote control operation
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to C SOURCE and then
press 1V-AUX.
Button
3 ENTER
Function
Subsequent menu
k
Menu up
n
Menu down
l
Previous menu
h
Subsequent menu
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without
the aid of the OSD of this unit.
y
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse
mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD
of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in
the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL”
parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 89). You can
also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD.
Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to
suit your personal preferences.
Notes
hh
Search forward (Press and hold)
a
Skip forward
b
Skip backward
s
Stop
e
Pause (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
p
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• The Yamaha logo appears in the display window of your iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front
panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are
replaced with underscores “_”.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the OSD. Use the simple remote mode to enjoy
watching the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
Play (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
F MENU
Previous menu
I DISPLAY
Display
English
Search backward (Press and hold)
6 ll
BASIC
OPERATION
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in
“Troubleshooting” on page 122.
• Once your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal
of this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod.
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges
the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “STANDBY CHARGE” parameter in
“INPUT MENU” (on page 87).
• While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 34) appears in the
front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears.
61 En
Using iPod™
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to C SOURCE and then
press 1V-AUX.
1
Press I DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following display appears in the OSD.
iPod
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Settings
2
Notes
Top
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
Press 3 k / n / l / h on the remote control
to navigate the iPod menu and then press
3 ENTER to begin playback of the selected
song.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),
Albums (albums), Songs (songs),
Genres (genres), Composers (composers),
Settings (settings)
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
Shuffle Shuffle
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random
order.
• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in
random order.
Notes
• When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “
”
appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being
shuffled.
• Press 3ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of
“Shuffle”.
62 En
Repeat Repeat
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
• When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “
1
” or
“ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a
sequence of songs are being repeated.
• Press 3ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the settings of
“Repeat”.
All
■ The function of the play information
display
7
iPod[Play]
1/9
FrankieZipper
Made-to-order
RoadtoIndia
|||||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
0:51-7:44
All
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
1 Track number/total tracks
2 Name of the artist
3 Name of the album
4 Name of the song
5 Progress bar
6 Elapsed time
7 Shuffle and repeat icons
8
(playback),
(pausing),
(search backward)
9 Remaining time
(search forward) or
Recording
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
Caution
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded.
Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its
operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.
Notes
BASIC
OPERATION
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• TONE CONTROL (see page 52) and the volume settings, the speaker level (see page 79) and the sound field programs (see page 46)
do not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog audio OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
• The analog audio and video signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog audio OUT (REC) jacks and DVR or VCR
OUT jacks for recording.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be
disturbed due to those signals.
1
Turn on all the connected components.
2
Rotate the C INPUT selector (or press one
of the input selector buttons (1)) to select
the source component you want to record
from.
3
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
4
Start recording on the recording component.
English
63 En
Advanced sound configurations
Changing sound field parameter
settings
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
3
Press one of the sound field program
selector buttons (N) repeatedly to select the
desired sound field program you want to
adjust.
4
Press 3 k / n to select the desired sound
field parameter and then 3 l / h to change
the selected sound field parameter value.
• Press 3 h to increase the value.
• Press 3 l to decrease the value.
Note
You cannot change the sound field parameter values when
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see
page 90). If you want to change the sound field parameter values,
set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
1
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP
and then press I PARAMETER on the
remote control.
The following display is shown in the OSD.
Sound field program category
MOVIE
Cursor
.
1/2
Sci-Fi
SUR.;;PLIIx Movie
DSP LEVEL;;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;;16ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;;16ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;;1.0
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound
field parameter, see page 66.
• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the
initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the
sound field parameter name in the OSD.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field
program parameter settings.
• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field
programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.
In this case, press 3k / n to scroll through pages.
• If you press and hold 3l / h to change the sound field
parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown
momentarily in the front panel display.
• To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program,
press 3n repeatedly to select “INITIALIZE” and then press
3h. Once the confirmation screen appears in the OSD, press
3h to confirm or 3l to cancel the initialization.
MOVIE
[p]/[[]: Select
2/2
Sci-Fi
SB INIT.DLY;;15ms
SB ROOM SIZE ;;1.0
DIALOG LIFT;;;;;0
. INITIALIZE
Sound field parameters Sound field parameter
values
[[]: Initialize
5
Press I PARAMETER to turn off the sound
field parameter display.
SYSTEM MEMORY feature
You can save multiple customized sound field parameter
settings by using the SYSTEM MEMORY feature. See
page 93 for details.
64 En
Advanced sound configurations
■ Basic configuration of sound field
programs
Each sound field program has some parameters defining
the characteristics of the program. To customize the
selected sound field program, adjust “DSP LEVEL” and/
or “DIALOG LIFT” first, and then try other parameters.
Adjusting the vertical dialogue position
(DIALOG LIFT)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is
at the center of the video monitor screen.
y
To change sound field parameter settings, see page 64 for details.
Adjusting the effect sound level of the sound
field programs (DSP LEVEL)
Sound field programs add effect sounds (DSP effect
sounds) to the original source sound to create sound field
in the listening room. Use the “DSP LEVEL” parameter to
adjust the level of the effect sounds.
The DSP effect
sound level is low.
The DSP effect sound
level is high.
Increase the value of “DSP LEVEL” when
• the effect sound of the selected sound field
program is too weak.
• you cannot recognize any difference between the
sound field programs.
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video
monitor screen, increase the value of “DIALOG LIFT”.
Move up to the ideal dialogue position.
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
“0” (initial setting) is the lowest position, and “5” is the
highest position.
Notes
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Adjust “DSP LEVEL” as follows:
The ideal
dialogue
position
• “DIALOG LIFT” is available only when “PRESENCE SP” is
set to “ON” (see page 78).
• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial
dialogue position.
Decrease the value of “DSP LEVEL” when
• the sound is vague.
• you feel that the additional sound effect is
excessive.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
English
65 En
Advanced sound configurations
■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
y
To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 64 for details.
Sound field parameter
INIT.DLY
P.INIT.DLY
S.INIT.DLY
SB INIT.DLY
Features
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back sound field initial delay. Changes the
apparent size of the sound field by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first
reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the smaller the sound field seems to the
listener.
y
When you adjust the initial delay parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the
corresponding room size parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the
CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)
1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INIT.DLY)
Source sound
Level
Level
Level
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms
66 En
Large value = 99 ms
Advanced sound configurations
Sound field parameter
ROOM SIZE
P.ROOM SIZE
S.ROOM SIZE
SB ROOM SIZE
Features
Room size. Presence, surround and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the
sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is
repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original
reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected
sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one
to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
y
When you adjust the room size parameters, we also recommend that you adjust the
corresponding initial delay parameters likewise. This adjustment is especially effective for the
CINEMA DSP programs.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
Time
Early
reflections
Level
Level
Level
Source sound
Time
Time
Sound source
Small value = 0.1
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the
hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which
has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as
“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets
you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Control range: 0 to 10
Source sound
Time
Small reflected
sound
Small value = 0
Level
Dead
Level
Live
Level
LIVENESS
S.LIVENESS
SB LIVENESS
Large value = 2.0
Time
Time
Large reflected
sound
Large value = 10
English
67 En
Advanced sound configurations
Sound field parameter
REV.TIME
Features
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time to get more sustaining
reverberation sound, and set a shorter time to get articulate sound.
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Source sound
Reverberation
Reverberation
Early reflections
60 dB
60 dB
REV.TIME
Sound source
REV.TIME
Short
reverberation
REV.TIME
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
REV.DELAY
60 dB
Large value = 5.0 s
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Level
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Source sound
(dB)
60 dB
Reverberation
Time
REV.DELAY
REV.LEVEL
REV.TIME
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
Level
Control range: 0 to 100%
Source sound
REV. LEVEL
Time
68 En
Advanced sound configurations
Sound field parameter
DIRECT
(“2ch Stereo” only)
Features
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo
sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
y
• Select “AUTO” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when
“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 52).
• Select “OFF” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when
“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.
• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front
left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are redirected to the subwoofer in the
following cases:
– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 77).
– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 77) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see
page 77).
CT
SL
SR
SB
PL
PR
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right
levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 to 100%
(“7ch Stereo” only)
EFFECT LEVEL
(“Straight Enhancer” and
“7ch Enhancer” only)
Straight and 7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. The high-frequency signals of
some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Choices: HIGH, LOW
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.
Selecting decoders
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel
sources (surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected
decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multichannels.
y
You can change the decoder parameter settings. Press
I PARAMETER and then 3k / n repeatedly on the remote
control to select the desired decoder parameter. You can change
the value of the selected parameter by pressing 3l / h
repeatedly on the remote control.
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP and
then press K SUR. DECODE repeatedly on the
remote control to select the surround decode
mode.
You can select the desired surround decoder mode
depending on the type of source you are playing and your
personal preference.
English
69 En
Advanced sound configurations
■ Decoder descriptions
Remote control
button
SUR.DECODE
+10
Name of the
decoder (SUR.)
Category and name
of the program
PLIIxMusic
PLIIMusic
SUR. DECODE
Sur. Decode
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not
available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78).
PANORAMA
DIMENSION
CENTER WIDTH
Available decoder parameters (see page 71)
SUR.DECODE
+10
SUR. DECODE
Sur. Decode
Program description
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
SUR.DECODE
+10
SUR. DECODE
Sur. Decode
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/
R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78).
SUR.DECODE
+10
SUR. DECODE
Sur. Decode
PLIIx Music
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/
R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78).
PANORAMA
SUR.DECODE
+10
DIMENSION
SUR. DECODE
Sur. Decode
CENTER WIDTH
PLIIx Game
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR.B L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78).
SUR.DECODE
+10
SUR. DECODE
Sur. Decode
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources.
SUR.DECODE
+10
SUR. DECODE
Sur. Decode
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources.
C. IMAGE
y
When you select the surround decode mode for the multi-channel digital sources, this unit automatically selects the corresponding
decoder for each source.
70 En
Advanced sound configurations
Decoder parameter descriptions
Decoder parameter
PANORAMA
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Features
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as
well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
DIMENSION
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front
or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
CENTER WIDTH
(“PLIIx Music” and “PLII
Music” only)
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
C.IMAGE
(“Neo:6 Music” only)
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) to
1.0 (center channel sound output only from the center speaker)
Initial setting: 0.3
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Selecting decoders used with sound
field programs (SUR.)
Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with
MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).
See page 49 for details about MOVIE sound field
program.
Available decoders
Decoder
Functions
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro
Logic II) processing for movie
sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is
not available when “SUR.B L/R SP” is
set to “NONE” (see page 78).
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources
English
71 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Auto setup AUTO SETUP
Use this feature to automatically adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 37).
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Basic menu 1 BASIC MENU
Menu
Functions
Page
LFE/BASS OUT
Selects the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the
low-frequency signals.
77
FRONT SP
Selects the size of the front speakers.
77
CENTER SP
Selects the size of the center speaker.
77
SUR. L/R SP
Selects the size and number of the surround speakers.
78
SUR.B L/R SP
Selects the size and number of the surround back speakers.
78
PRESENCE SP
Selects whether this unit uses the presence speakers.
78
CROSS OVER
Selects the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 77 and
78).
78
SUBWOOFER PHASE
Switches the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or
unclear.
79
PRIORITY
Prioritizes either the presence or the surround back speakers when
playing back sources that contain surround back channel signals using
the CINEMA DSP sound field programs.
79
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
FR.L/FR.R/
CENT./SUR.L/
SUR.R/SB L/SB R/
SWFR/PR.L/PR.R
Adjust the balance the speaker levels between the front left or
surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET”
(see page 77).
79
C)SP DISTANCE
UNIT
Selects the unit to adjust the speaker distance.
80
FRONT L/FRONT R/
CENTER/SUR. L/
SUR. R/SB L/SB
R/SWFR/PRNS L/
PRNS R
Adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the
respective channel.
80
Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER SET”,
“SPEAKER LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE” settings.
80
A)SPEAKER SET
D)TEST TONE
72 En
Parameter
—
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Volume menu 2 VOLUME MENU
Parameter
Functions
Page
ADAPTIVE DRC
Selects whether this unit automatically adjusts the dynamic range in conjunction with the
volume level or not.
81
ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL
Selects whether this unit adjusts the DSP effect level automatically in conjunction with the
volume level or not.
81
MUTING TYPE
Adjusts how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 44).
81
MAX VOL.
Sets the maximum volume level of the main zone.
81
INIT. VOL.
Sets the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on.
81
Sound menu 3 SOUND MENU
Menu
A)EQUALIZER
E)AUDIO SET
F)HDMI SET
Page
EQ TYPE SELECT
Selects the type of equalizer.
82
GEQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of the speakers when you set “EQ TYPE
SELECT” to “GEQ”.
82
TEST
Selects whether this unit outputs the test tone while making adjustments
of “GEQ” or not.
82
SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
83
HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
83
Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the speakers.
83
HEADPHONE
Adjusts the amount of the dynamic range compression of the
headphones.
83
HDMI AUTO
Selects whether this unit activates the automatic audio and video
synchronization function (automatic lip sync) or not.
84
AUTO DELAY
Makes fine adjustments of the audio delay when the automatic audio
and video synchronization function is active.
84
MANUAL DELAY
Adjustment the audio delay manually when the connected video
monitor is not compatible with the automatic audio and video
synchronization function or “HDMI AUTO” is set to “OFF”.
84
EXTD SUR.
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES
decoders by using the connected surround back speakers.
84
TONE BYPASS
Selects whether the audio output bypasses the tone control circuitry
when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 52).
84
SUPPORT AUDIO
Selects whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
85
C)DYNAMIC RANGE SPEAKER
D)LIPSYNC
Functions
ADVANCED
OPERATION
B)LFE LEVEL
Parameter
English
73 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Input menu 4 INPUT MENU
Note
Some parameters described below may not be available for all input sources and some parameters are only available for specific input
sources.
Parameter
Functions
Page
I/O ASSIGNMENT
Assigns the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of
this unit do not correspond to your needs.
86
INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
86
VOL. TRIM
Adjusts the level of the signal input at each jack.
86
DECODER MODE
Switches the decoder activation mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks for
DTS signals.
86
STANDBY CHARGE
Selects whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
standby mode (see page 61).
87
BGV
Selects the video source played back in the background of the sources input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
87
INPUT CH
Selects the number of channels input from an external decoder.
87
FRONT
Selects the analog jacks at which the front channel signals from an external decoder are input
when you set “INPUT CH” to “8CH”.
87
Option menu 5 OPTION MENU
Menu
A)DISPLAY SET
74 En
Parameter
Functions
Page
DIMMER
Adjusts the brightness of the front panel display.
88
OSD SHIFT
Adjusts the vertical position of the OSD.
88
GRAY BACK
Selects whether this unit displays a gray background in your video
monitor when there is no video signal being input.
88
SHORT MESSAGE
Selects whether this unit displays the short messages on the video
monitor after you perform a certain operation.
88
ON SCREEN
Sets the time for which the iPod menu is displayed in the OSD after
you perform a certain operation.
88
FL SCROLL
Selects the mode to display the information of your iPod in the front
panel display.
89
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Menu
B)VIDEO SET
Parameter
Selects whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO, S
VIDEO, and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
89
COMPONENT I/P
Selects whether this unit activates the analog interlace/progressive
conversion of the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO,
and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the analog video signals
deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p are output at
the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.
89
HDMI SCALING
Selects whether this unit activates the HDMI up-conversion of the
analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the up-scaled analog video
signals are output at the HDMI OUT jack.
89
HDMI ASPECT
Adjusts the aspect ratio for analog video signals output at the HDMI
OUT jack.
90
Prevents accidental changes to sound field program parameter values
and other system settings.
90
AUDIO SELECT
Designates the default audio input jack select setting for the input
sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the
power of this unit.
91
DECODER MODE
Designates the default decoder mode for the input sources connected
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
91
EXTD SUR.
Designates the extended decoder mode for the input sources connected
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit.
91
AMP
Selects how the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers are amplified.
91
VOLUME
Selects whether this unit controls the volume level of the audio signals
output at the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks.
92
MAX VOL.
Adjusts the maximum volume level in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
92
INIT. VOL.
Sets the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 when you turn on the power
of this unit.
92
—
ADVANCED
OPERATION
E)ZONE SET
Page
VIDEO CONV.
C)MEMORY GUARD
D)INIT. CONFIG
Functions
■ System memory SYSTEM MEMORY
Use this feature to create your favorite settings and assign the settings to each M SYSTEM MEMORY button
(see page 93).
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 44).
English
75 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
4
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
• If you press I PARAMETER during the “SET MENU”
operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled.
• Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each
parameter setting.
• Press 4 RETURN to return to the previous menu level.
1
2
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP
and then press F SET MENU to enter “SET
MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
Press 3 k / n repeatedly and then press
3 ENTER to select and enter the desired
menu.
The following displays are examples where “SOUND
MENU” is selected.
3 SOUND MENU
. A)EQUALIZER
B)LFE LEVEL
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
D)LIPSYNC
E)AUDIO SET
F)HDMI SET
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
5
Press 3 k / n to select “MANUAL SETUP”.
p
Using SET MENU
Press 3 k / n repeatedly and then press
3 ENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
The following display is an example where “LFE
LEVEL” is selected.
SET MENU
B)LFE LEVEL
;AUTO SETUP
. ;MANUAL SETUP
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
;SYSTEM MEMORY
;SIGNAL INFO
HEADPHONE;;-20dB
3
p
Press 3 ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the
OSD.
6
Press 3 k / n to select the desired parameter
and then 3 l / h to change the parameter
settings.
• Press 3 h to increase the value.
• Press 3 l to decrease the value.
7
Press F SET MENU to exit from “SET
MENU”.
MANUAL SETUP
. 1 BASIC MENU
2
3
4
5
VOLUME MENU
SOUND MENU
INPUT MENU
OPTION MENU
76 En
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
p
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Adjust
[
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
1 BASIC MENU
Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker
settings. Most of the “BASIC MENU” parameters are set
automatically when you run the automatic setup.
1 BASIC MENU
Measure for the speaker size
The woofer section of a speaker is
– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large
– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
. A)SPEAKER SET
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
C)SP DISTANCE
D)TEST TONE
A)SPEAKER SET
FRONT SP
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
SMALL
y
Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the
“SPEAKER SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL” and “SP DISTANCE”.
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRONT, BOTH
A)SPEAKER SET
LFE/BASS OUT
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get natural bass sound:
Select “SWFR” (subwoofer). The LFE signals as well
as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to
“SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.
When a subwoofer is connected to this unit
and you want to get rich bass sound:
Select “BOTH” (both). The low-frequency signals of
any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE
signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to
the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front
left and right channels are directed to the front left and
right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting.
When the front speakers are small:
Select “SMALL” (small).
Notes
• When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT”, the LFE signals
found in bitstream sources, the low-frequency signals of the
front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of
other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to
the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP”
setting.
• When “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRONT”, you can select
only “LARGE” in “FRONT SP”. If the value of “FRONT SP” is
set to other than “LARGE” in advance, this unit change the
value to “LARGE” automatically.
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: NONE, SMALL, LARGE
A)SPEAKER SET
CENTER SP
NONE >SMALL
LARGE
When the center speaker is large:
Select “LARGE” (large).
When the center speaker is small:
Select “SMALL” (small).
When you do not use the center speaker:
Select “NONE” (none). The center channel signals are
directed to the front left and right speakers.
English
When you do not use a subwoofer:
Select “FRONT” (front). The LFE signals, the
low-frequency signals of the front left and right
channels, and the low-frequency signals of other
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed
to the front left and right speakers regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting.
When the front speakers are large:
Select “LARGE” (large).
ADVANCED
OPERATION
SWFR FRONT>BOTH
>LARGE
77 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
When you do not use the surround back
speakers:
Select “NONE” (none). The surround back channel
signals are directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
Measure for the speaker size
The woofer section of a speaker is
– 16 cm (6.5 in) or larger: large
– smaller than 16 cm (6.5 in): small
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SMALL, LARGE
y
See page 17 for the connection information of the surround
back speakers.
A)SPEAKER SET
Notes
SUR. L/R SP
NONE >SMALL
If the Dolby TrueHD audio signals are input and “SUR.B L/R
SP” is set to “NONE”, the left and right surround back
channels are not directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
LARGE
When the surround speakers are large:
Select “LARGE” (large).
When the surround speakers are small:
Select “SMALL” (small).
Presence speakers PRESENCE SP
Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers
connected to this unit.
Choices: NONE, YES
A)SPEAKER SET
When you do not use the surround speakers:
Select “NONE” (none). This unit is set to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode (see page 51), and “SUR.B L/R
SP” is automatically set to “NONE”.
PRESENCE SP
y
NONE
See page 17 for the connection information of the surround
back speakers.
When you do not use the presence speakers:
Select “NONE” (none).
Surround back left/right speakers
SUR.B L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2
A)SPEAKER SET
SUR.B L/R SP
NONE
SMLx1 >SMLx2
When the surround back left and right
speakers are large:
Select “LRGx2” (large x 2).
When the single surround back speaker is
large:
Select “LRGx1” (large x 1).
>YES
When you use the presence speakers:
Select “YES” (yes).
Note
“DIALOG LIFT” is available only when “PRESENCE SP” is set
to “YES”.
Bass cross over CROSS OVER
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see page 77). All frequencies below
the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to
the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER
SET” (see page 77).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
When the surround back left and right
speakers are small:
Select “SMLx2” (small x 2).
A)SPEAKER SET
CROSS OVER
When the single surround back speaker is
small:
Select “SMLx1” (small x 1).
FREQ;;;;80Hz
y
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover
frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and
set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
78 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
A)SPEAKER SET
SUBWOOFER PHASE
>NORMAL
■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 77).
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting:
FR.L/FR.R/SWFR/PR.L/PR.R: 0 dB
CENT./SUR.L/SUR.R/SB L/SB R: –1.0 dB
REVERSE
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Choice
Functions
NORMAL
(normal)
Does not change the phase of your subwoofer.
REVERSE
(reverse)
Sets the phase of your subwoofer to reverse.
Presence/surround back channel priority
PRIORITY
Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the
surround back speakers when playing back 2-channel
audio sources using the sound field programs.
1/2
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
. FR.L
. SB L
FR.R
CENT.
SUR.L
SUR.R
SPEAKER LEVEL
2/2
SB R
SWFR
PR.L
PR.R
Adjusted speaker
FR.L
Front left speaker
FR.R
Front right speaker
CENT.
Center speaker
SUR.L
Surround left speaker
SUR.R
Surround right speaker
SB L
Surround back left speaker
SB R
Surround back right speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
PR.L
Presence left speaker
PR.R
Presence right speaker
A)SPEAKER SET
PRIORITY
Choice
Functions
PRNS
Uses the presence speakers.
SUR.B
Uses the surround back speakers.
y
For details about the sound output from each speaker in sound
field programs, refer to “Sound output in each sound field
program” in “APPENDIX” at the end of this manual.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
PRNS >SUR.B
y
• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the
crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or
slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
• Set “TEST TONE” to “ON” to output the test tone for the
“SPEAKER LEVEL” setting (see page 80).
Notes
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SB” is displayed if “SUR. B L/
R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see page 78).
English
79 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
y
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover
frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and
set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
C)SP DISTANCE
1/2
C)SP DISTANCE
. UNIT;;;;;;meters
. SB L;;;;;;;;2.40m
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Select
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Adjust
p
[
SB R;;;;;;;;2.40m
SWFR;;;;;;;;3.00m
PRNS L;;;;;;3.00m
PRNS R;;;;;;3.00m
p
• The available speaker channels differ depending on the setting
of the speakers.
• Instead of “SB L” and “SB R”, “SUR.B” is displayed if
“SUR.B L/R SP” is set to either “SMLx1” or “LRGx1” (see
page 78).
2/2
FRONT L;;;;3.00m
FRONT R;;;;3.00m
CENTER;;;;;2.60m
SUR. L;;;;;2.40m
SUR. R;;;;;2.40m
[
Notes
■ Test tone D)TEST TONE
Turns the test tone output on or off for the “SPEAKER
SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL”, and “SP DISTANCE”
settings.
D)TEST TONE
Unit for the speaker distance adjustment UNIT
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)
[Other models]: meters (m)
Choice
ON
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Return
Functions
meters (m)
Adjusts speaker distances in meters.
feet (ft)
Adjusts speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Initial setting:
FRONT L/FRONT R/SWFR/PRNS L/
PRNS R: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)
SUR. L/SUR. R/SB L/SB R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
SP DISTANCE
Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SB L
Surround back left speaker
SB R
Surround back right speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
PRNS L
Presence left speaker
PRNS R
Presence right speaker
80 En
>OFF
Choice
Functions
OFF
This unit does not output the test tone for the
“SPEAKER SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL”, and
“SP DISTANCE” settings.
ON
This unit outputs the test tone for the
“SPEAKER SET”, “SPEAKER LEVEL”, and
“SP DISTANCE” settings.
y
If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s
length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening
position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,
calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.
Note
This function is automatically turned off if you exit “BASIC
MENU”.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
2 VOLUME MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the various volume
settings.
Adaptive DSP level ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the DSP
effect level (see page 65) automatically in conjunction
with the volume level.
Choice
2 VOLUME MENU
AUTO
OFF
Does not adjust the DSP effect level
automatically.
. ADAPTIVE DRC;;;;OFF
ADAPTIVE DSP
LEVEL;;;;OFF
MUTING TYPE;;;;FULL
MAX VOL.;;;;+16.5dB
INIT. VOL.;;;;;;OFF
Functions
Adjusts the DSP effect level in conjunction with
the volume level.
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Select
Note
Output level
AUTO
OFF
Input level
OFF
Input level
VOLUME: low
Choice
AUTO
VOLUME: high
Functions
AUTO
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
OFF
Does not adjust the dynamic range
automatically.
y
• You can also adjust the dynamic range of the bitstream signal
sources by using “DYNAMIC RANGE” in “SOUND MENU”
(see page 83).
• This function is also useful for listening with your headphones.
Note
The adaptive dynamic range control feature does not function
when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode (see page 52).
Even if you set “ADAPTIVE DSP LEVEL” to “AUTO”, this unit
does not change but the fine-tunes the specified value of “DSP
LEVEL” (see page 65).
Muting type MUTING TYPE
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 44).
Choice
Functions
FULL
Mutes all the audio output.
–20dB
Reduces the current volume by 20 dB.
Maximum volume MAX VOL.
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected
loud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume
range is –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB. However, when “MAX
VOL.” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes
–80.0 dB to –5.0 dB.
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Output level
Adaptive dynamic range control
ADAPTIVE DRC
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range in
conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful
when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When
“ADAPTIVE DRC” is set to “AUTO”, this unit controls
the dynamic range as follows:
– If the VOLUME setting is low:
the dynamic range is narrow
– If the VOLUME setting is high:
the dynamic range is wide
Notes
• When this unit is in the auto setup procedure, the volume level
is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “MAX
VOL.” setting.
• The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume
setting. For example, if “INI.VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and
“MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is
automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of
this unit next time.
• Use “MAX VOL.” in “ZONE SET” to set the initial volume
level in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Initial volume INIT. VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone
when the power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the initial volume
setting.
81 En
English
Note
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Use this feature to adjust the audio parameters.
3 SOUND MENU
. A)EQUALIZER
B)LFE LEVEL
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
D)LIPSYNC
E)AUDIO SET
F)HDMI SET
Graphic equalizer GEQ
Use this feature to match the tonal quality of the center,
surround L/R and surround back L/R, surround back,
presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer with that of the
front L/R speakers. You can adjust 7 frequency bands
(63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz).
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
A)EQUALIZER
A)EQUALIZER
1/2
Equalizer type select EQ TYPE SELECT
Use this feature to select the type of equalizer.
. 2.5kHz
6.3kHz
16kHz
0dB
0dB
0dB
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Adjust
[
[
Use this feature to select the parametric equalizer or the
graphic equalizer.
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
p
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Select
■ Equalizer A)EQUALIZER
2/2
TEST >OFF ON
CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L
TEST >OFF ON
. CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L
p
3 SOUND MENU
y
Press 3 k / n to select a frequency band and 3 l / h to adjust
the selected frequency band.
A)EQUALIZER
OFF
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Enter
Functions
AUTO PEQ
Uses the parametric equalizer adjusted in
“AUTO SETUP” (see page 37).
GEQ
Adjusts the built-in 7-frequency band graphic
equalizer so that the tonal quality of the speakers
matches. Press 3 ENTER to display the graphic
equalizer screen.
OFF
The “GEQ” parameter can be adjusted only when “GEQ” is
selected in “EQ TYPE SELECT”.
Test tone TEST
Use this feature to make adjustments of “GEQ” while
listening to a test tone. To select “TEST”, press 3k / n
repeatedly in the graphic equalizer screen.
A)EQUALIZER
1/2
. TEST
>OFF ON
CHANNEL;;;;FRONT L
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Select
Deactivates the equalizing feature.
[
Choice
Note
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
p
EQ TYPE SELECT
AUTO PEQ >GEQ
[NATURAL]
y
Currently applied parametric equalizer type (see page 40) appears
under “AUTO PEQ”.
Choice
OFF
Does not output test tones and output the
currently selected source component.
ON
Outputs test tones from the selected speakers.
Note
You can select “AUTO PEQ” only when you carry out “AUTO
SETUP” in advance (see page 37). In this case, “AUTO PEQ” is
automatically selected as the default setting.
82 En
Functions
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Low-frequency effect level
■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE
B)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes bitstream signals.
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding bitstream signals.
C)DYNAMIC RANGE
SPEAKER;;;;;;;;;MAX
. HEADPHONE;;;;;;;MAX
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Select
B)LFE LEVEL
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Adjust
Speakers SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Speakers SPEAKER
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the speakers.
Headphones HEADPHONE
Adjusts the dynamic range compression for the
headphones.
Choice
Headphones HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
• MIN: Adjusts the dynamic range to narrow
when this unit is decoding bitstream signals
(except Dolby TrueHD).
• AUTO: Adjusts the dynamic range according
to the instruction of the input source signals
when this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD
signals.
STD
Adjusts the dynamic range to medium. When
this unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD signals, the
dynamic range control is always active
regardless of the instruction of the input source
signals.
MAX
Preserves the greatest amount of dynamic range.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
MIN/AUTO
Note
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 77),
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT
jack.
Functions
English
83 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Audio and video synchronization
(Lip sync) D)LIPSYNC
■ Audio settings E)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the audio and video
synchronization.
E)AUDIO SET
. EXTD SUR.;;;;;;AUTO
TONE BYPASS;;;;AUTO
D)LIPSYNC
. HDMI AUTO;;;;;;OFF
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Select
HDMI Automatic lip sync mode HDMI AUTO
If the connected video monitor is connected to the HDMI
OUT jack of this unit and compatible with the automatic
audio and video synchronization function (automatic lip
sync), this unit adjusts the audio and video
synchronization automatically. Use this feature to activate
or deactivate the automatic lip sync.
Choices: ON, OFF
If the connected video monitor is compatible
with the automatic lip sync:
Select “ON”. Use “AUTO DELAY” to make fine
adjustments of the audio and video synchronization.
If the video monitor is not compatible with the
automatic lip sync or you do not want to use
the automatic lip sync:
Select “OFF”. Use “MANUAL DELAY” to adjust the
audio and video synchronization.
Auto delay AUTO DELAY
Use this feature to make fine adjustments of the audio and
video synchronization when you set “HDMI AUTO” to
“ON”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Select
AUTO DELAY;;;---ms
(offset;;;---ms)
MANUAL DELAY;;;0ms
Extended surround EXTD SUR.
Use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for
multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
Dolby Digital EX, or DTS-ES decoders by using the
connected surround back speakers.
Choice
Functions
AUTO
Activates the optimum decoder to play back
signals in 6.1/7.1 channels when this unit
recognizes a signal flag being input.
PLIIxMovie
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.
PLIIxMusic
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/
7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music
decoder.
EX/ES
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/
7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or
DTS-ES decoder.
EX
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/
7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX
decoder.
OFF
Does not use any decoders to create 6.1/7.1
channels.
Tone bypass TONE BYPASS
Use this feature to select whether the audio output
bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and
“BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 52).
y
“offset” indicates the difference between the value of the audio
delay that this unit sets automatically and the value of the audio
delay that you set in “AUTO DELAY”. This unit stores the value
of “offset” and applies the value to other automatic lip sync
compatible video monitors.
Manual delay MANUAL DELAY
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the sound output
manually to synchronize audio with video images when
you set “HDMI AUTO” to “OFF”.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Control step: 1 ms
84 En
Choice
Functions
AUTO
Automatically bypasses the tone control
circuitry to provide the purest signal possible
when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB.
OFF
Does not bypass the tone control circuitry.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
F)HDMI SET
SUPPORT AUDIO
RX-V1800
4 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to adjust the parameters of each input
source.
4 INPUT MENU
. A)
Choice
RX-V1800
OTHER
Functions
Plays back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The
HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI input
jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack
on the rear panel of this unit.
Plays back HDMI audio signals on another
HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT
jack.
• This unit transmits audio and video signals input at the HDMI
input jacks to the HDMI OUT jack only when this unit is turned
on even if “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”.
• Available audio/video signals depend on the specification of the
connected video monitor. Refer to the instruction manual of
each connected component.
Input source
4 INPUT MENU
. H)
I)
J)
K)
L)
M)
2/2
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
V-AUX
DOCK
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
Parameter
A)TUNER
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
B)MULTI CH
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
BGV
INPUT CH
FRONT
C)PHONO
D)CD
E)CD-R
F)MD/TAPE
G)BD/HD DVD
H)DVD
I)DTV/CBL
J)DVR
K)VCR
L)V-AUX
I/O ASSIGNMENT
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
DECODER MODE
M)DOCK
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM
STANDBY CHARGE
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Notes
p
[
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Return
Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI
audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component
connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this
unit.
1/2
TUNER
B) MULTI CH
C)
PHONO
D)
CD
E)
CD-R
F) MD/TAPE
G) BD/HD DVD
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
p
Use this feature to select the component to play back
HDMI audio signals.
[
■ HDMI set F)HDMI SET
Note
Some parameters described above may not be available for all
input sources and some parameters are only available for specific
input sources.
English
85 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
DVR
Notes
• You can use up to 9 characters for each input.
• Press 3 n to change the character in the following order,
or press 3 k to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.), space.
3
Repeat steps 1 through 2 to rename each
input source.
4
Press 3 ENTER to complete.
. COMPONENT IN;;;[C]*
COAXIAL IN;;;;;(3)
OPTICAL IN;;;;NONE
OPTICAL OUT;;;NONE
HDMI IN;;;;;;;;[4]
Current ( DTV/CBL )
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Enter
y
• “NONE” appears in the OSD when any input source is not
assigned to the input/output jack.
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• An asterisk (*) appears to the right of the input/output jack
names that have been changed from their previous settings.
• The currently assigned input source for the selected input/
output jack appears in the OSD (“Current ( DTV/CBL )” in the
display example above).
Press 3k / n to select the character you
want to use and then press 3l / h to move
to the next space.
Volume trim VOL. TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This feature is useful if you want to balance the
level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in
volume when switching between input sources.
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
A)
Input rename INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
A)
.
TUNER
p
[p]/[[]: Position
[ ]/[ ]: Character
[ENTER]: Enter
[RETURN]: Return
[
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Adjust
y
TUNER
INPUT RENAME
TUNER
y
This parameter also affects the signals output at the audio ZONE
OUT jacks.
Decoder mode DECODER MODE
Use this feature to switch the decoder mode. You can
designate the reassigned digital input jacks for DTS
signals.
You can also change the name of the input source that appears in
the display window (A) on the remote control. Refer to
“Changing source names in the display window” on page 102.
D)
Press 3l / h to place the “_” (underscore)
under the space or the character you want to
edit.
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Select
Choice
86 En
CD
I/O ASSIGNMENT
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
. DECODER MODE;;;AUTO
[
1
TUNER
INPUT RENAME
. VOL. TRIM;;;;+6.0dB
p
J)
2
p
Input/output assignment
I/O ASSIGNMENT
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
parameter to reassign the respective jacks and effectively
connect more components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
the corresponding component by using the C INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on
the remote control).
Functions
AUTO
Automatically detects digital audio signal input
types and selects the appropriate decoder.
DTS
Activates the DTS decoder when digital audio
signals are input.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Charge on standby STANDBY CHARGE
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the
battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
standby mode (see page 61).
Choice
Input channels INPUT CH
Use this setting to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder (see page 30).
Choice: 6CH, 8CH
Functions
B) MULTI CH
Multi-channel input BGV BGV
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks.
B) MULTI CH
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
. BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST
INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH
Choice
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Select
Functions
Automatically selects the last selected video
source as the background video source.
BD/HD DVD,
DTV/CBL,
DVD, DVR,
VCR, V-AUX
Selects the corresponding input source as the
background video source.
OFF
Does not play the video source in the
background.
p
If the connected component outputs discrete
6-channel audio signals:
Select “6CH”.
If the connected component outputs discrete
8-channel audio signals:
Select “8CH”. Also set “FRONT” (see below) to the
analog audio jacks at which the front left and right
channel signals output from the connected component
are input.
Note
If “AMP” is set to “[SP1]”, “[SP2]” or “BOTH” (see page 91), no
sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you
select “8CH”. In this case, select “6CH” and set the output setting
of the external component to 6 channels.
Front left and right channels input jack FRONT
If you selected “8CH” in “INPUT CH”, you can select the
analog audio jacks at which the front left and right channel
signals output from the connected external decoder is
input.
Choices: CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, BD/HD DVD, DVD,
DTV/CBL, VCR, DVR, V-AUX
ADVANCED
OPERATION
LAST
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Select
[
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod only
when this unit is turned on.
B) MULTI CH
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST
INPUT CH;;;;;;;;8CH
. FRONT;;;;;BD/HD DVD
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Select
p
OFF
INPUT RENAME
VOL. TRIM;;;;;0.0dB
BGV;;;;;;;;;;;;LAST
. INPUT CH;;;;;;;;6CH
[
AUTO
Charges the battery of the stationed iPod when
this unit is turned on and in the standby mode.
Note
“FRONT” parameter appears only when you set “INPUT CH” to
“8CH”.
English
87 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
5 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
Gray back GRAY BACK
Use this feature to display a gray background in your
video monitor when there is no video signal being input.
Choice
5 OPTION MENU
AUTO
Displays a gray background on your video
monitor when there is no video signal being
input.
OFF
Does not display a gray background on your
video monitor.
. A)DISPLAY SET
B)VIDEO SET
C)MEMORY GUARD
D)INIT. CONFIG
E)ZONE SET
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Note
Use “VIDEO” of “INITIALIZE” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to
set “OSD SHIFT” and “GRAY BACK” to the factory presets (see
page 116).
Functions
Notes
• Depending on the video signals being input or the system
setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be
displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to
“OFF”.
• Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not
be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the
picture.
A)DISPLAY SET
. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;;;;0
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;+5
GRAY BACK;;;;;;AUTO
SHORT MESSAGE;;;;ON
ON SCREEN;;;;ALWAYS
FL SCROLL;;;;;;CONT
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Adjust
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: –4 to 0
Control step: 1
• Press 3 l to make the front panel display dimmer.
• Press 3 h to make the front panel display brighter.
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Control range: –5 (downward) to +5 (upward)
Control step: 1
Initial setting: 0
• Press 3 l to lower the position of the OSD.
• Press 3 h to raise the position of the OSD.
Short message display
SHORT MESSAGE
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message
display function.
Choice
ON
Activates the short message display function.
The contents of the front panel display appear at
the bottom of the screen each time you operate
this unit.
OFF
Deactivates the short message display function.
Note
The short message display does not appear in the following cases:
– when the component video signals with 480p/576p, 720p,
1080i or 1080p resolutions are input
– When HDMI video signals are input
On-screen display time ON SCREEN
Use this feature to set the time for which the iPod menu is
displayed in the OSD after you perform a certain
operation.
Choice
88 En
Functions
Functions
ALWAYS
Displays the OSD unceasingly during an
operation.
10S
Turns off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform
a certain operation.
30S
Turns off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform
a certain operation.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL
Use this feature to set the mode to display the iPod menu
(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel
display.
Choice
Functions
CONT
Continuous mode.
Select this to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
ONCE
Scroll-once mode.
Select this to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
Component interlace/progressive up-conversion
COMPONENT I/P
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog
interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video
signals input at the composite video, S-video and
component video jacks so that the analog video signals
deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p
are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.
Choice
Functions
ON
Activates the analog interlace/progressive upconversion of the analog video signals.
OFF
Deactivates the analog interlace/progressive upconversion of the analog video signals.
■ Video settings B)VIDEO SET
Notes
B)VIDEO SET
. VIDEO CONV.;;;;;;ON
COMPONENT I/P;;;OFF
HDMI SCALING;;;480p
HDMI ASPECT;;;THRGH
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Select
Choice
Functions
ON
Converts composite, S-video, and component
video signals interchangeably and up-converts
composite, S-video, and component video
signals to HDMI video signals.
OFF
Does not convert any signals.
HDMI scaling HDMI SCALING
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI upscaling of the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S
VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks so that the upscaled video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jack.
This unit up-scales the video signals as follows:
• 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p or
1080p
• 480p/576p → 1080i, 720p or 1080p
Choice
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals
input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO, and COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks.
• The “COMPONENT I/P” parameter appears only when you set
“VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.
• If your video monitor does not support analog video signals
with 480p/576p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be
displayed on your video monitor when “COMPONENT I/P” is
set to “ON”. In such a case, set the “COMPONENT I/P”
parameter to “OFF”.
Functions
THROUGH
Does not up-scale any analog video signals.
480p (or
576p), 1080i,
720p, 1080p
Up-scales analog video signals to 480p or 576p,
1080i, 720p, or 1080p of resolution.
Notes
Note
This unit does not up-scale the analog component video signals
with 720p or1080i of resolution.
English
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) of resolution are converted into the S-video or composite
video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• The analog component video signals with 1080p of resolution
are only output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted into component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the sound field
parameter display and short message display.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.
89 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Memory guard C)MEMORY GUARD
Notes
• The “HDMI SCALING” parameter appears only when you set
“VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.
• If you connect your video monitor via HDMI connection, this
unit automatically detects the available video signal resolution
of the video monitor, and an asterisk (*) appears on the left of
the available video signal resolution(s).
• If this unit cannot detect the available video signal resolution(s)
of the connected video monitor, set “MONITOR CHECK” (see
page 116) to “SKIP” and then set “HDMI SCALING” again.
• This unit does not convert between 480 line video signals and
576 line video signals.
HDMI aspect ratio HDMI ASPECT
Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for
analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack.
Choice
Does not make any adjustments to the aspect
ratio for the HDMI video signal sources.
16:9
Displays video images with the aspect ratio of
4:3 on your video monitor with the aspect ratio
of 16:9. Black stripes appear on the right and
left sides as a result.
Fits video images with the aspect ratio of 4:3 to
your video monitor with the aspect ratio of 16:9.
Notes
• When “HDMI SCALING” is set to “THROUGH”, you cannot
make any adjustments to “HDMI ASPECT”.
• If the aspect ratio of the input video source is other than 4:3, this
unit automatically ignores the setting of “HDMI ASPECT”.
• When “HDMI ASPECT” is set to “SMART”, the video images
of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.
• When the video signals are input at HDMI IN jacks or the
signals are input with 720p, 1080i or 1080p of resolution, the
setting of “HDMI ASPECT” does not affect the video signals
output at the HDMI OUT jack.
90 En
C)MEMORY GUARD
>OFF
ON
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Return
Choice
Functions
OFF
Turns off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature.
ON
Protects:
– sound field program parameters
– “AUTO SETUP” items
– “SYSTEM MEMORY” (“SAVE”)
– all speaker levels
– “MANUAL SETUP” items
Functions
THROUGH
SMART
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to sound
field program parameter and other system settings.
Notes
• You can change the following parameters even if “MEMORY
GUARD” is set to “ON”:
– “AUDIO SET” parameters (see page 84)
– “DECODER MODE” (see page 86)
– “MEMORY GUARD”
• When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, “ G ” appears at the
top right of the “SET MENU” screen.
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
■ Initial configuration D)INIT. CONFIG
■ Zone set E)ZONE SET
Use this feature to select the settings of the audio input
jack select, active decoders and extended surround when
you turn on this unit.
Use this feature to set the items related in Zone 2 or Zone
3.
E)ZONE SET
D)INIT. CONFIG
.
>ZONE2
DECODER MODE;;AUTO
EXTD SUR.;;;;;AUTO
Choice
AUTO
LAST
Functions
Automatically detects the type of audio input
signals and selects the appropriate audio input
jack select setting.
Automatically selects the last audio input jack
select setting used for the connected input
source.
Choice
Functions
AUTO
Automatically detects the type of input signals
and select the appropriate decoder mode setting.
LAST
Automatically selects the last decoder mode
setting used for the connected input source.
Extended surround EXTD SUR.
Use this feature to designate the extended decoder mode
(see page 84) for the input sources connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of
this unit.
Choice
Functions
AUTO
Automatically detects the digital audio input
signals and activates the appropriate decoder.
LAST
Automatically selects the last decoder mode set
for “EXTD SUR.” in “SOUND MENU”.
Setting zone
Select the zone to set up “AMP”, “VOLUME”, “MAX
VOL.” and “INIT. VOL.”.
Choice
Functions
ZONE2
Sets the “ZONE SET” parameters for Zone 2.
ZONE3
Sets the “ZONE SET” parameters for Zone 3.
Zone 2/Zone 3 amplifier AMP
Use this feature to select how the Zone 2 or Zone 3
speakers are amplified. This parameter also effects the
speaker settings and the sound output of sound field
programs in the main zone.
Choices: EXT, [SP1], [SP2], BOTH
When the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 are
connected to the external amplifier, and the
external amplifier is connected to the ZONE
OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks of this unit:
Select “EXT”. See “Using external amplifiers” on
page 108 for details.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Decoder mode DECODER MODE
Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode
(see page 86) for the input sources connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of
this unit.
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[p]/[[]: Select
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Return
Audio select AUDIO SELECT
Use this feature to designate the default audio input jack
select setting (see page 43) for the input sources connected
to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power
of this unit.
ZONE3
AMP;;;;;;;;;;;;EXT
VOLUME;;;;;;;;;VAR
MAX VOL.;;;-30.0dB
INIT. VOL.;+16.5dB
. AUDIO SELECT;;AUTO
Note
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP”
(see page 116), you can only set “AMP” to “EXT” in
“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3”.
When the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 is
connected to the SP1 speaker terminals of this
unit directly:
Select “[SP1]”. See “Using the internal amplifiers of
this unit” on page 109 for details.
Note
When you set “AMP” to “[SP1]” in “ZONE 2” or “ZONE
3” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is
output from the surround back speakers.
English
91 En
Customizing this unit (MANUAL SETUP)
When the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 is
connected to the SP2 speaker terminals of this
unit directly:
Select “[SP2]”. See “Using the internal amplifiers of
this unit” on page 109 for details.
Note
When you set “AMP” to “[SP2]” in “ZONE 2” or “ZONE
3” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is
output from the surround speakers.
If the speakers in Zone 2 or Zone 3 are
connected to both the SP1 and SP2 speaker
terminals (for example, the speakers are
connected via the bi-amplifier connection, or
there are four speakers in a room) or if you
want to play back the same source in Zone 2
and Zone 3 simultaneously:
Select “BOTH”. See “Using the internal amplifiers of
this unit” on page 109 for details.
Notes
• When you set “AMP” to “BOTH” in “ZONE 2” or
“ZONE 3”, you can only set “AMP” to “EXT” in the other
zone setting.
• When you set “AMP” to “BOTH” in “ZONE 2” or
“ZONE 3” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no
sound is output from both the surround and surround back
speakers.
Zone 2/Zone 3 volume VOLUME
Use this feature to select whether this unit controls the
volume level of the audio signals output at the ZONE
OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks when you set “AMP” to
“EXT” (see page 91).
Choices: VAR, FIX
When you want to control the volume level of
the selected zone on this unit:
Select “VAR”. You can adjust the ZONE OUT (ZONE
2 or ZONE 3) volume level simultaneously with
B VOLUME +/– on the remote control.
When you want to control the volume level of
the selected zone on the external amplifier:
Select “FIX”. This unit fixes the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2
or ZONE 3) volume level to a standard line level.
Zone 2/Zone 3 maximum volume MAX VOL.
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Control range: –30.0 dB to +15.0 dB, +16.5 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
Note
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT. VOL.”
setting. For example, “INIT. VOL.” is set to –20.0 dB and then
“MAX VOL.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is
automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this
unit next time.
Zone 2/Zone 3 initial volume INIT. VOL.
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone
3 when the power of Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on.
Choices: OFF, MUTE, –80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Note
The “MAX VOL.” setting takes priority over the “INIT. VOL.”
setting.
92 En
Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)
Use this feature to save up to six of your favorite settings
that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save the
following system setting parameters:
Saved parameters
Page
“BASIC MENU” parameters
(except “TEST TONE”)
77
“VOLUME MENU” parameters
(except “INIT. VOL.”)
81
“SOUND MENU” parameters*
(except “EXTD SUR.”)
82
“DISPLAY SET” parameters
(except “SHORT MESSAGE”)
88
“VIDEO SET” parameters
89
Currently selected sound field program
(or the Pure Direct mode)
46
Sound field parameter settings
64
Tonal quality control settings*
52
■ Saving by the SET MENU operation
You can save the system settings stored in “MEMORY1”
to “MEMORY6” by using the “SYSTEM MEMORY”
menu in “SET MENU”.
1
Press F SET MENU on the remote control.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
o
SET MENU
;AUTO SETUP
. ;MANUAL SETUP
;SYSTEM MEMORY
;SIGNAL INFO
2
* The settings of “DYNAMIC RANGE”, “LFE LEVEL”, and
the tonal quality control for headphones are not saved.
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
Press 3n to select “SYSTEM MEMORY” and
then press 3 ENTER.
The “SYSTEM MEMORY” menu appears in the
OSD.
SYSTEM MEMORY
ADVANCED
OPERATION
. 1 LOAD
2 SAVE
Saving the current system settings
■ Saving by the MSYSTEM MEMORY
buttons
You can save the system settings stored in “MEMORY1”
to “MEMORY4” by pressing the corresponding
MSYSTEM MEMORY buttons.
3
p
[
[]/[]: UP/DOWN
[ENTER]: Enter
Before performing the following operations, set the operation
mode selector on the remote control to C AMP.
Press 3n to select “SAVE” and then press
3 ENTER.
The following menu appears in the OSD.
SYSTEM MEMORY
. SAVE;;;;;;;CURRENT
Press and hold one of the MSYSTEM MEMORY
buttons on the remote control for 4 seconds.
“MEMORY 1 SAVE Done” (example) appears in the front
panel display, and then this unit saves the current system
setting to the corresponding memory number.
Church in Freiburg
ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO
EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ
YPAO PEQ;;;NATURAL
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Return
Current system parameters
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
2
3
4
Note
If system settings are already saved in the selected memory
number, this unit overwrites the old system settings.
English
93 En
Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)
4
Press 3 l / h repeatedly to select the
desired memory number (“MEMORY1” to
“MEMORY6”).
1
SYSTEM MEMORY
Press one of the M SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons on the remote control to select the
desired memory number.
“MEMORY 1 LOAD” (example) appears in the front
panel display.
. SAVE;;;;;;;MEMORY1
SYSTEM MEMORY
Drama
ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO
EQUALIZER;;;;;;GEQ
YPAO PEQ;;;;;;NONE
1
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Return
• If system settings are already stored in the selected
memory number, the stored system parameter settings
appear in the menu screen. “EMPTY” appears in the menu
screen if no system settings are stored in the selected
memory number.
• If system settings are already saved in the selected
memory number, this unit overwrite the old system
settings.
• If you save the system settings to “MEMORY1” to
“MEMORY4”, you can load the stored settings by
pressing the corresponding MSYSTEM MEMORY
buttons (see page 94).
5
Press 3 ENTER to save the current system
settings to the selected memory number.
6
Press F SET MENU again to exit from “SET
MENU”.
3
4
y
“EMPTY” appears in the menu screen if no system settings
are stored in the selected memory number.
Stored system parameters in the
selected memory number
y
2
2
Press the selected M SYSTEM MEMORY
button once more to confirm the selection.
This unit loads the settings stored in the selected
memory number.
■ Loading by the SET MENU operation
1
Press F SET MENU on the remote control.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2
Press 3 n to select “SYSTEM MEMORY” and
then press 3 ENTER.
The “SYSTEM MEMORY” menu appears in the
OSD.
3
Press 3 ENTER to select “LOAD”.
The following menu appears in the OSD.
SYSTEM MEMORY
. LOAD;;;;;;;CURRENT
Loading the stored system settings
Church in Freiburg
ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO
EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ
YPAO PEQ;;;NATURAL
• Before performing the following operations, set the
operation mode selector on the remote control to C AMP.
• This unit overwrites the stored settings to the current
settings of this unit. If you do not want to erase the current
settings, save the current settings to any SYSTEM
MEMORY number in advance.
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Return
4
■ Loading by the M SYSTEM MEMORY
buttons
You can recall the system settings stored in “MEMORY1”
to “MEMORY4” by pressing the corresponding
M SYSTEM MEMORY buttons.
Press 3 l / h repeatedly to select the
desired memory number where the system
settings are stored and then press
3 ENTER.
This unit loads the selected system settings.
SYSTEM MEMORY
. LOAD;;;;;;;MEMORY6
Straight
ADAPTIVE DRC;;AUTO
EQUALIZER;;;;;;PEQ
YPAO PEQ;;;;;;FLAT
[p]/[[]: Select
[ENTER]: Load
5
94 En
Press F SET MENU to exit from “SET
MENU”.
Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)
■ Example 2: Switching the settings for
different room environments
Using examples
■ Example 1: Comparing the results of the
automatic setup and manual setup
This unit is equipped with three types of parametric
equalizer settings (see page 40), and you can also make
your customized configuration of the sound settings of this
unit by using the “MANUAL SETUP” parameters (see
page 72). To compare the results of the automatic setup or
your manual configuration, use the MSYSTEM
MEMORY buttons.
The tonal characteristics of the listening room may vary
depending on the situations of the room (for example,
whether the curtains are open or closed), and the settings
of this unit should be arranged for each situation of the
room. You can switch between the settings of this unit
easily by using MSYSTEM MEMORY buttons.
SYSTEM MEMORY 1
The settings when the curtains of the
listening room are closed
SYSTEM MEMORY 1
The current settings of this unit
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
SYSTEM MEMORY 2
The results of the automatic setup
(EQ: NATURAL)
5
2
3
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
5
6
7
3
6
7
4
MOVIE
8
SYSTEM MEMORY 2
The settings when the curtains of
the listening room are open
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
2
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
4
MOVIE
8
Saving each setting
SYSTEM MEMORY 3
The results of the automatic setup
(EQ: FRONT)
Close the curtains of the listening room and
then perform the automatic setup.
See page 37 for details of the automatic setup.
2
Press and hold MSYSTEM MEMORY 1 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the settings for the current room
situation (i.e. the curtains are closed) to
“MEMORY1”.
3
Open the curtains of the listening room and
the perform the automatic setup.
4
Press and hold M SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the current room situation (i.e. the
curtains are open) to “MEMORY2”.
Saving each setting
Note
Carry out the following procedure when all the parameters are set
to default values.
1
Press and hold MSYSTEM MEMORY 1 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the current settings of this unit to
“MEMORY1”.
Perform the automatic setup.
Set “EQ” to “NATURAL”. See page 40 for details.
3
Press and hold MSYSTEM MEMORY 2 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the results of the automatic setup
performed in step 2 to “MEMORY2”.
4
Perform the automatic setup again.
This time, set “EQ” to “FRONT”.
5
Press and hold MSYSTEM MEMORY 3 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the results of the automatic setup
performed in step 4 to “MEMORY3”.
English
2
ADVANCED
OPERATION
1
95 En
Saving and recalling the system settings (SYSTEM MEMORY)
■ Example 3: Saving the sound
configurations for specific sources
■ Example 4: Switching multiple audio and
video synchronization settings
The desired sound configurations are different for each
input source. For example, if you use the sound field
program “Village Vanguard” for a music source of a live
jazz performance, the parameter settings may differ when
the input source is a vinyl record or an SACD. You can
store the sound settings for each input source.
If you use two different kinds of video monitors or
projectors, and these components are not compatible with
the automatic audio and video synchronization feature,
you should set “MANUAL DELAY” for each component.
You can switch between the different “MANUAL
DELAY” settings by using the MSYSTEM MEMORY
buttons.
SYSTEM MEMORY 1
The “Village Vanguard” program configured
for the SACD sources
SYSTEM MEMORY 1
The settings for the LCD video monitor
connected to the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
2
3
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
5
6
7
4
SYSTEM MEMORY
1
MOVIE
8
5
SYSTEM MEMORY 2
The “Village Vanguard” program configured for
the vinyl record sources
Saving each setting
2
3
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
6
7
4
MOVIE
8
SYSTEM MEMORY 2
The settings for the video projector connected
to the HDMI OUT jack
Saving each setting
y
See page 64 for the sound field program parameter settings.
1
Start playback of the desired live jazz
performance recorded on the SACD.
2
Set the sound field program to “Village
Vanguard” and then adjust the parameters
for the current playback sources.
3
Press and hold MSYSTEM MEMORY 1 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the current sound field program
settings to “MEMORY1”.
4
Change the input source to “PHONO” and
then start playback of the desired live jazz
performance recorded on the vinyl record.
5
Adjust the sound field program parameters
for the current playback source.
6
Press and hold M SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the current sound field program
settings to “MEMORY2”.
96 En
Note
In the following example, the LCD video monitor and one input
component (for example, VCR) are connected to the S VIDEO
input jack and S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, and the video
projector and the other input component (for example, DVD
player) are connected to one of the HDMI IN jacks and HDMI
OUT jack.
1
Start playback of the desired video source on
the connected LCD video monitor and then
adjust “MANUAL DELAY” in “SOUND MENU”
appropriately (see page 84).
2
Press and hold M SYSTEM MEMORY 1 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the audio and video synchronization
settings for the LCD video monitor to “MEMORY
1”.
3
Change the input source to the component
connected to one of the HDMI IN jacks and
then start playback.
4
Adjust “MANUAL DELAY” in “SOUND MENU”
appropriately.
5
Press and hold M SYSTEM MEMORY 2 for
4 seconds.
This unit stores the audio and video synchronization
settings for the video projector to “MEMORY 2”.
Remote control features
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by Yamaha
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 99).
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
■ Controlling this unit
■ Controlling a TV
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP to control this
unit.
Set the operation mode selector to C TV to control your
TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate
remote control code for DTV/CBL or PHONO in advance
(see page 99). When you set the remote control codes for
both DTV and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for
DTV.
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
MULTI CH IN
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
*1
*1
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
MULTI CH IN
TUNER
CD
CD-R
PHONO
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
V-AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
SELECT
SELECT
AMP
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
Set to AMP
SOURCE
–
–
TV INPUT
MUTE
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
PURE DIRECT
+
+
CH
VOLUME
*1
*1
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
MENU
TITLE
MENU
SRCH MODE
BAND
SRCH MODE
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
PARAMETER
*1
2
3
7
6
EFFECT
SYSTEM MEMORY
8
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
+ 10
*2
5
7
6
4
MOVIE
8
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
ENT
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
+ 10
ENT
*2
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
REC
REC
ON
3
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
DISC SKIP
DISC SKIP
OFF
2
1
4
MOVIE
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
9
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
SYSTEM MEMORY
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
5
AUDIO
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
1
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
AUDIO
Set to TV
TV
SET MENU
TITLE
BAND
ENTER
*2
SOURCE
TV
SET MENU
+
TV VOL
ADVANCED
OPERATION
–
TV MUTE
*2
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
OFF
RENAME
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
Notes
Notes
*1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component
operation mode selector is set to C AMP.
*1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
Remote control
Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER
Turns on or off the power.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV MUTE
Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT
Changes the input source.
97 En
English
*2 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode
selector is set to C TV. For details, see the “TV” column on
page 98.
Remote control features
■ Controlling other components
Set the operation mode selector to C SOURCE to control
other components selected with the input selector buttons
(1) or . You must set the appropriate remote control
code for each input source in advance (see page 99). The
following table shows the function of each control button
used to control other components assigned to each input
selector button (1) or . Be advised that some buttons
may not correctly operate the selected component.
TV MUTE
[1]
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
TUNER
CD
MD/TAPE
DVD
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
[2]
CH +
CH –
Power *1
MUTE
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
[8]
[9]
AUDIO
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
[10]
EFFECT
2
1
[6]
3
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
5
7
6
4
MOVIE
8
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SELECT
[2]
The remote control has 14 modes (input areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 14
different components.
AV POWER
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
TITLE
BAND
V-AUX/DOCK
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
+ 10
ENT
[11]
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
SOURCE
[1]
LEVEL
SYSTEM MEMORY
y
Blu-ray Disc/
DVD player/
HD DVD
DVD
player/
recorder
recorder
[3]
[4]
[5]
LEVEL
[7]
REC
DISC SKIP
TV
OFF
ON
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
Set to SOURCE
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
ENTER
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO
VCR
Cable TV/
Satellite
tuner
TV
LD player
CD player
MD recorder/
Tape deck
CD recorder
Tuner
Power *1
Power *1
Power *1
DVR power
Power *1
Power *1
Power *1
Power *1
Power *1
TV
channel up*3
TV
channel up*3
Channel up
Channel up
Channel up
TV
channel up*3
TV
channel up*3
TV
channel up*3
TV
channel up*3
TV
channel up*3
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
Channel down Channel down Channel down
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
Title
*2
[3]
TITLE
Title
Title
Title
Title
[4]
ENTER
Menu enter
Menu enter
Menu select
Menu select
PRESET/CH k
Menu up
Menu up
Menu up
Menu up
Preset up
(1 to 8)
PRESET/CH n
Menu down
Menu down
Menu down
Menu down
Preset down
(1 to 8)
A/B/C/D/E l
Menu left
Menu left
Menu left
Menu left
Preset down
(A to E)
A/B/C/D/E h
Menu right
Menu right
Menu right
Menu right
Band
Direction A/B
[5]
RETURN
Return
Return
Return
Return
Return
[6]
1-9, 0, +10
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
[7]
ll
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
DVR search
backward *2
DVR search
backward *2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
hh
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
DVR search
forward *2
DVR search
forward *2
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
b
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Chapter/Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Direction
back
a
Skip forward
Skip forward
Chapter/Skip
forward
Skip forward
Skip forward
Direction
forward
REC/
DISC SKIP
Rec
(recorder)
Disc skip (player)
Rec
Rec (recorder)
DVR rec *2
DVR rec *2
Disc skip
Rec
Rec
s
Stop
Stop
Stop
DVR stop *2
DVR stop *2
Stop
Stop
Stop
e
Pause
Pause
Pause
DVR pause *2 DVR pause *2 Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
p
Play
Play
Play
DVR play *2
DVR play *2
Play
Play
Play
[8]
MENU
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
[9]
AUDIO
Display
Display
Display
Display
Enter/recall
Enter
[10] DISPLAY
[11] ENT
Audio
Audio
Display
Display
Stop
Play
Preset up
(A to E)
Audio
Enter
Display
Notes
*1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a power button.
*2 These buttons operate your video recorder (DVD recorder, etc.) only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see
page 99).
*3 These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column.
98 En
Remote control features
■ Selecting a component to be controlled
You can select a component to be controlled
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons (1).
Press A SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the
desired component.
The name of the component to be controlled appears in the
display window (A) on the remote control.
Setting remote control codes
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available remote
control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at
the end of this manual.
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each input area.
SELECT
Remote control code default settings
■ Controlling optional components
(Option mode)
“OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be
programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This area is useful for
programming commands that are to be used only as a part
of a macro function or for components that do not have a
valid remote control code.
To select the option mode, press A SELECT n
repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display
window on the remote control.
Note
You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See
page 101 to program buttons operated within this component
control area.
Library
(component
category)
Manufacturer
Default
code
TAPE
—
2700
TUNER
Yamaha
2607
TUNER
TUNER
Yamaha
2602
CD
CD
Yamaha
2300
CD-R
CD-R
Yamaha
2400
MULTI CH
IN
DVD
Yamaha
2100
MD/TAPE
MD
Yamaha
2500
DVD
DVD
Yamaha
2100
BD/HD DVD
DVD
Yamaha
2100
PHONO
TV
—
—
DTV/CBL
TV
—
—
DVR
DVR
Yamaha
2807
VCR
VCR
—
—
V-AUX/
DOCK
TUNER
Yamaha
2606
ADVANCED
OPERATION
SELECT
Input area
Note
You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if a
Yamaha remote control code is preset as listed above.
In this case, try setting another Yamaha remote control code.
English
99 En
Remote control features
1
Set the operation mode selector to
C SOURCE and then press an input selector
button (1), or
to select the input area
you want to set up.
4
Press the numeric buttons (5 ) to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the
component you want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of
this manual.
AMP
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
SYSTEM MEMORY
SOURCE
1
TV
2
3
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
5
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
7
6
4
MOVIE
8
V-AUX/DOCK
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
9
5
2
Press and hold L LEARN for about 3
seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
The library name (e.g. L;DVD) and the name of the
selected input area (e.g. DVD) appear alternately in
the display window (A) on the remote control.
LEARN
0
+ 10
ENT
Press 3 ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window (A) on the
remote control if setting is successful.
“NG” appears in the display window (A) on the
remote control if the setting is unsuccessful. In this
case, start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press the input selector button (1) or , or
ASELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then
repeat steps 2 through 5.
6
Press L LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
LEARN
y
• You can set a remote control code of a different type of
component to an input area. Press 3l / h repeatedly to
change the library (component category).
Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR,
L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),
L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable),
L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR
• If you want to setup for another input area, press the input
selector button (1) or , or press A SELECT k / n
repeatedly to select the input area.
Notes
• Be sure to press and hold L LEARN for at least 3
seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.
3
Press 3 ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected component
appears in the display window (A).
Note
“0000” appears in the display window (A) if no code has
been set.
100 En
7
Press 6 p (play) or AV POWER to confirm
whether you can control your component
using the remote control.
POWER
or
AV
y
If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your
component has more than one code, try each of them until
you find the correct one.
Notes
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including Yamaha components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the learn feature (see “Programming
codes from other remote controls” on page 101) or use the
remote control supplied with the component.
• Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over
remote control code functions.
Remote control features
Programming codes from other
remote controls
2
AUDIO SEL
STANDBY
SLEEP
POWER
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
AV
CD-R
POWER
CD
VCR
BD/HD DVD
TV
TUNER
DVR
DVD
POWER
MD/TAPE
V-AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL
SELECT
You can program remote control codes from other remote
controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program
functions not included in the basic operations covered by
the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control
code is not available. You can program the function of
other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas
in the following illustration. The buttons can be
programmed independently for each input area.
Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control
on a flat surface so that their infrared
transmitters are aimed at each other.
Other remote control
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
TITLE
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
SET MENU
PURE DIRECT
MENU
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
SRCH MODE
BAND
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PARAMETER
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
3
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
V-AUX/DOCK
5
7
6
4
MOVIE
8
3
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
SELECT
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
SOURCE
TV MUTE
LEVEL
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
Set to
SOURCE
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
+ 10
ENT
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
REC
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
TV
MUTE
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
Note
LEARN
Notes
• Do not press and hold L LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control
code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 3.
Set the operation mode selector to
C SOURCE and then press an input selector
button (1) or to select an input area.
4
Note
Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to C SOURCE.
When you set the operation mode selector to C AMP and
program a remote control codes from other remote controls, the
programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this
unit.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some
special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the
operating instructions for the other remote control.
1
Press L LEARN using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“LEARN” and the name of the selected input area
(e.g. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display
window (A) on the remote control.
Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” appears in the display window (A) on the
remote control.
English
101 En
Remote control features
5
Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window (A) on
the remote control.
“NG” appears in the display window (A) on the
remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this
case, start over from step 4.
Changing source names in the
display window
You can change the name of the input source that appears
in the display window (A) on the remote control if you
want to use a different name from the factory preset. This
feature is useful when you have set an input area to control
a different component.
AUDIO SEL
STANDBY
SLEEP
POWER
PHONO
MULTI CH IN
AV
CD-R
POWER
CD
VCR
BD/HD DVD
TV
TUNER
DVR
DVD
POWER
MD/TAPE
SELECT
V-AUX/DOCK
DTV/CBL
1
Other remote control
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or
C SOURCE and then press an input selector
button (1), or
to select the input area
you want to rename.
The name of the selected input area appears in the
display window (A).
AMP
SOURCE
TV
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
y
• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4
and 5.
• If you continuously want to program another function for
another component, press A SELECT k / n to select the
component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.
6
or
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Press L LEARN again to exit the learning
mode.
LEARN
Notes
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– when the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each
other at the appropriate angle.
– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– when the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
102 En
2
Press L RENAME using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
RENAME
Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from step 2.
Remote control features
3
Press 3 k / n to select and enter a character.
Pressing 3 n changes the character as follows:
A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),
/ (slash), and space.
Pressing 3 k changes the characters in reverse order.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Macro programming features
The macro programming feature makes it possible to
perform a series of operations with the press of a single
button. For example, when you want to play a CD,
normally you would turn on the components, select the
CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The
macro programming feature lets you perform all of these
operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The
buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with
macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(see page 105).
■ MACRO operations
4
Macro buttons
Press 3 h to move the cursor to the next
position.
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
+ 10
ENT
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
REC
PRESET/CH
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
y
Press 3 l to move the cursor to the previous position.
MACRO ON/OFF
1
Set the L MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON.
Press 3 ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window (A) on the
remote control if renaming was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window (A) on the
remote control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this
case, start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to rename another input area, press
the input selector button (1) or , or press A SELECT k /
n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 3
through 5.
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
2
Press the desired macro button.
3
Set the L MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF
when you finish to using the macro
programming operation.
OFF
6
ON
ADVANCED
OPERATION
OFF
5
MACRO
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
Press L RENAME again to exit the renaming
mode.
RENAME
Notes
Note
“ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote
control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step,
or when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does
not accept any other operation until it has completed running
the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing).
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.
English
103 En
Remote control features
■ Default macro functions
Pressing
macro button
To automatically transmit these signals in order
First
Second
Third
STANDBY
STANDBY
POWER
POWER
—
—
(*1)
(*2)
POWER
TV
POWER
—
—
POWER
TUNER
—
TUNER
CD
CD
CD-R
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
MD/TAPE
DVD
(*3)
—
(CD area) (*4)
(CD-R area) (*4)
—
(MD/TAPE area) (*4)
DVD
(DVD area) (*4)
POWER
BD/HD DVD
—
(*1)
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL
DVR
DVR
VCR
VCR
(BD/HD DVD area) (*4)
—
—
(DVR area) (*4)
(VCR area) (*4)
V-AUX/DOCK
V-AUX/DOCK
—
*1 You can turn on some components (including Yamaha components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC
OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.
*2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV/CBL or PHONO (see page 99), you can turn on the power of
your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.
*3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.
*4 Playback can be started for any Yamaha remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, Blu-ray
Disc player, HD DVD player or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play
button on the input area of that component (see page 101) or set a remote control code (see page 99) in advance.
104 En
Remote control features
■ Programming macro operations
You can program your own macro and use the macro
programming feature to transmit several remote control
commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to
set up remote control codes or perform learning operations
before programming the macro.
Note
“AGAIN” appears in the display window (A) if you press a
button other than a macro button.
3
Notes
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.
• We do not recommend programming continuous operations
such as volume control in a macro.
1
Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote
control automatically exits the macro mode.
Example:
Set the input source to DVD → Activate the DVD
player → Set the sleep timer
Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press DVD.
Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press AV POWER.
Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press SLEEP.
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or
C SOURCE and then press L MACRO using
a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window (A) on the
remote control.
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
STANDBY
2
AMP
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DVR
1
3
SOURCE
TV
or
MACRO
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
SELECT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Indicates the
number of macro
steps entered
Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
2
Flashes alternately so you can
set the next step
Press the L MACRO button you want to use
to operate the macro.
The macro button name (e.g. “M;DVD”) and the
selected component name (e.g. “DVD”) appear
alternately in the display window (A) on the remote
control.
STANDBY
Note
To change the selected input area, press A SELECT k / n.
Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,
whereas A SELECT k / n only changes the selected input
area.
POWER
4
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
Press L MACRO again using a ballpoint pen
or similar object when the operation
sequence you want to program is complete.
Note
“ERROR” appears in the display window (A) if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
English
105 En
Remote control features
Clearing configurations
3
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names
and setup remote control codes.
Press and hold L CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“WAIT” appears in the display window (A). If
clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the
display window (A) on the remote control.
■ Clearing function sets
CLEAR
1
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or
C SOURCE and then press L CLEAR by
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“CLEAR” appears in the display window (A).
y
AMP
Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the
button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer
setting if you have set remote control codes).
SOURCE
TV
or
Notes
CLEAR
• “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to
complete.
• “C;NG” appears in the display window (A) if clearing
was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) if you press
a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from step 1.
2
Press 3 k / n to select the clear mode.
L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area)
Clears all learned functions in the respective
input area. The name of a component is shown
after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector
button to select the input area.
L;AMP
Clears all learned functions for controlling the
amplifier functions of this unit.
L;ALL
Clears all learned functions.
M;ALL
Clears all programmed macros.
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY
Clears all remote functions and returns the
remote to the factory settings.
4
Press LCLEAR again to exit.
■ Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned for a certain button in
each control area.
1
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or
C SOURCE and then press an input selector
button (1), or
to select the input area
containing the function you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
or
AMP
SOURCE
TV
106 En
Remote control features
2
Press L LEARN using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name
(e.g. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display
window.
■ Clearing a macro function
You can clear the function programmed for a certain
macro button.
1
LEARN
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or
C SOURCE and then press L MACRO using
a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window (A) on the
remote control.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Notes
MACRO
or
• Do not press and hold L LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote
control code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.
3
SOURCE
TV
Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
2
Press and hold L CLEAR using a ballpoint
pen or similar object, then press the macro
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window (A) on the
remote control if clearing was successful.
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Press and hold L CLEAR using a ballpoint
pen or similar object and then press the
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window (A) if
clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the
display window on the remote control, release the
ballpoint pen or similar object used to press
L CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote
control returns to the learning mode.
AMP
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 4.
• If you continuously want to clear another function for
another component, press A SELECT k / n to select the
input area, then repeat step 3.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).
4
Press L LEARN again to exit.
Notes
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 2.
• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you
have set remote control codes).
3
Press L MACRO again to exit the macro
programming mode.
Notes
• “C;NG” appears in the display window (A) on the remote
control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from
step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) on the remote
control if you press more than one button simultaneously.
107 En
English
• “C;NG” appears in the display window (A) on the remote
control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from
step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window (A) if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
y
Using multi-zone configuration
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this
unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone 2) and third zone (Zone 3). You can control
this unit from the second or third zone using the supplied remote control.
Connect the source component to the analog audio input jacks of this unit to play back the source in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
This unit does not output the audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT and HDMI jacks to the ZONE OUT jacks.
Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in Zone 2 and/or Zone 3.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in
Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 to the main zone (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).
• An amplifier and speakers for Zone 2 and/or Zone 3.
y
• You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit.
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.
REMOTE
REMOTE
IN
Infrared signal
receiver
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
Yamaha
component
Yamaha
component
This unit
REMOTE
IN
OUT
■ Using external amplifiers
To use an external amplifier in Zone 2 or Zone 3, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT jacks and select “EXT” in
“AMP” (see page 91).
From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 3) jacks
From the ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks
Amplifier
Amplifier
Analog audio signals only
This unit
DVD player etc.
Remote control
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Infrared signal
receiver
MAIN
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
Infrared signal
emitter
Main zone
From the REMOTE OUT jack
Second zone
(Zone 2)
Third zone
(Zone 3)
To the REMOTE IN jack
To the REMOTE IN jack
Notes
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
• Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the Zone 2/Zone 3 when “VOLUME” are set to “FIX” (see page 92).
108 En
Using multi-zone configuration
■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit
Important safety notice
The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or
more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.
If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and select either “[SP1]” or “[SP2]”
for “AMP” (see page 91).
If you want to use two internal amplifiers (SP1 and SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and select “BOTH” for “AMP”
(see page 91).
R
+
SP1
PRESENCE/ZONE 2/ZONE 3
–
–
SP2
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
L
+
R
L
+
R
+
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
–
–
SINGLE
L
+
–
Second zone
(Zone 2)
Third zone
(Zone 3)
Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3
You can select the zone you want to control by using the
control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.
■ Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3
Front panel operations
1
Press P ZONE 2 ON/OFF or P ZONE 3
ON/OFF on the front panel to individually
turn on or off Zone 2 or Zone 3.
2
Press P ZONE CONTROLS on the front
panel repeatedly to select the zone you want
to control.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit
Each time you press P ZONE CONTROLS, the
front panel display changes as shown below, and the
indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for
approximately 10 seconds. However, no indicator
flashes when the main zone is selected.
ZONE2
ZONE3
No indicator flashes
when the main zone is selected.
ZONE2
Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions.
ZONE3
Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions.
English
109 En
Using multi-zone configuration
y
• You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the
selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,
the currently selected zone mode is automatically
canceled. In this case, press P ZONE CONTROLS
again.
• The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3
are turned on.
3
Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone
2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of
Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of
the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3” on page 111 to perform further
operations.
Remote control operations
1
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP
and then press A SELECT k repeatedly to
select the zone you want to control.
“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display
window (A) on the remote control.
■ Turning on or off Zone 2 and/or Zone 3
using the remote control
8 POWER and 7 STANDBY on the remote control
work differently depending on the selected zone that
appears in the display window (A) on the remote control.
• When the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is
selected, you can turn on the main zone, Zone 2 or
Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode individually.
• When the all mode is selected, pressing 8 POWER
turns on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3
simultaneously and pressing 7 STANDBY sets them
to the standby mode simultaneously.
Control mode
Display window
(A)
Name of the selected
input area
Turns on the main
zone only or sets it to
the standby mode.
Zone 2 mode
“ZONE 2” or “2;name
of the selected input
area”
Turns on Zone 2 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
Zone 3 mode
“ZONE 3” or “3;name
of the selected input
area”
Turns on Zone 3 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
“ALL”
8 POWER: turns on
the main zone, Zone
2 and Zone 3.
7STANDBY: sets
the main zone, Zone
2 and Zone 3 to the
standby mode.
Main zone
mode
AMP
All mode
SOURCE
POWER
and
STANDBY
SELECT
TV
Notes
or
2
Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone
2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of
Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of
the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3” on page 111 to perform further
operations.
3
Press A SELECT k / n to exit from the
Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.
110 En
• When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN”
appears for a few seconds when 8POWER or 7STANDBY
is pressed.
• “ALL” appears in the display window (A) on the remote
control only when ASELECT n is pressed.
Using multi-zone configuration
Operate the following operations after activating the Zone 2
or Zone 3 operation mode.
■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Rotate the C INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the operation mode selector to C AMP
and then press one of the input selector buttons
on the remote control) to select the input source
of the selected zone.
If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2:
name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the
selected input source” is displayed in the display window
(A) on the remote control when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is
selected respectively.
■ Adjusting the balance of the speaker
level in Zone 2 or Zone 3
Press E TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
“BALANCE” and then rotate N PROGRAM on
the front panel to adjust the balance of the front
left and right speaker level of the selected zone.
■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP and
then press CH +/– on the remote control to
adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or
TV VOL +/– to adjust the low-frequency
response (BASS) respectively.
• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the FM/AM
tuning features in the selected zone. For details about
the FM/AM tuning operations, see “FM/AM tuning”
on page 54.
• Select “V-AUX” as the input source to play back the
sources in the iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10 sold separately) in
the selected zone. You can only control iPod in the
simple remote mode (see page 61).
+
TV VOL
–
AMP
SOURCE
BASS
TV
+
CH
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Note
–
The input sources are shared across all zones. You cannot select
the same input source in multiple zones simultaneously.
TREBLE
y
You must complete this step within 10 seconds while the selected
zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently
selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press
P ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel again.
■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Rotate Q VOLUME on the front panel (or press
B VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust
the volume level of the selected zone.
y
You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using
E TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see
“Adjusting the tonal quality” on page 52.
Note
Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display
window (A) of the remote control before you adjust the tonal
quality of the corresponding zone (see page 110).
y
Press D MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to
the selected zone.
Note
When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,
B VOLUME +/– can be used only when “VOLUME” is set to
“VAR” in “ZONE SET” (see page 92).
English
111 En
Using multi-zone configuration
■ Using Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control
(except Europe model)
You can control Zone 2 or Zone 3 features by using the supplied Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control. First, set the ID1/ID2
switch and ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch appropriately.
6 STANDBY
Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode.
POWER
1
2
3
TUNER
CD
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV/CBL
DVR
PRESET
STANDBY
CD-R
5
6
BD/HD DVD PHONO
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
VOLUME
7
MUTE
8
A/B/C/D/E
Note
This button is operational only when A MASTER ON/OFF on
the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
7 VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone
3.
8 MUTE
Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to
restore the audio output to the previous volume level.
9 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch
Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that
of Zone 3.
Controlling the tuner function (see page 54)
Select “TUNER” as the input source of the controlling zone
to use the following functions
4
ID1 ID2
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
9
2 PRESET k / n
Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when
the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see
page 56).
3 A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the preset station groups (A to E) (see
page 55).
Controlling the amplifier function
1 Input selector buttons
Selects the desired input source for the controlling zone.
4 ID1/ID2 switch
Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2 (see
page 114).
5 POWER
Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Note
This button is operational only when A MASTER ON/OFF on
the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
112 En
Advanced setup
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Notes
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see
page 33).
• Only A MASTER ON/OFF, O STRAIGHT and the N PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup
menu.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
Using the advanced setup menu
Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front
panel to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
2
Press and hold O STRAIGHT and then
press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED MENU”
appears in the front panel display.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8Ω MIN, 6Ω MIN
• Select “8Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .
• Select “6Ω MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
SPEAKER
IMP.
EFFECT
3
While holding
down
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
MASTER
Rotate the NPROGRAM selector to select
the parameter you want to adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
The impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ω or
higher.
Front
6Ω MIN
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Surround
4
Press O STRAIGHT repeatedly to change
the selected parameter setting.
5
Press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to save the new
setting and turn off this unit.
Surround back
■ Remote sensor
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
Impedance level
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Front
8Ω MIN
STRAIGHT
Speaker
ADVANCED
OPERATION
1
■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.
REMOTE SENSOR
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor on the
front panel of this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” if you want to activate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor.
• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor.
Note
113 En
English
We recommend that you set the parameter to “ON” in most cases.
Advanced setup
See page 113 for the operation of the advanced setup menu.
3
Press 3 ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected input area
appears in the display window(A) on the remote
control.
4
Press the numeric buttons (5 ) to enter the
four-digit remote control AMP ID code for the
input area you want to use.
■ RS-232C access on the standby mode
RS-232C STANDBY
Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode.
Choices: YES, NO
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES
[Other models]: NO
• Select “YES” to set this unit to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.
• Select “NO” to set this unit not to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.
Remote
control AMP
ID code*1
Operates this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2002
Operates this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
*1 The remote control setting.
*2 The setting of this unit.
5
Setting remote control AMP ID code
1
2
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or
C SOURCE.
Press 3 ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window (A) if the
setting was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window (A) if the
setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from
step 2.
PRESET/CH
Press and hold L LEARN for about 3
seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar
object and then press 3 l / h repeatedly
until “L;AMP” appears in the display window
(A) on the remote control.
PRESET/CH
RC AMP ID*2
2001
(initial setting)
■ Remote control AMP ID
RC AMP ID
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote
control recognition.
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “2001”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “2002”.
Function
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
6
Press L LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
LEARN
ENTER
LEARN
A/B/C/D/E
■ Remote control TUNER ID
RC TUNER ID
Notes
• Be sure to press and hold L LEARN for at least 3
seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.
114 En
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for
remote control recognition.
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “2602”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “2603”.
Advanced setup
Setting remote control TUNER ID
1
2
Set the operation mode selector to C AMP or
C SOURCE and then press 1TUNER on the
remote control to select the tuner to change
the remote control ID.
Press and hold L LEARN for about 3
seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar
object until “L;TUN” and “TUNER”
alternately appear in the display window (A).
LEARN
3 seconds
4
Remote
control
TUNER ID
code*1
Press 3 ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected input area
appears in the display window (A) on the remote
control.
RC TUNER
ID*2
Operates this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2603
Operates this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
*1 The remote control setting.
*2 The setting of this unit.
5
Press 3 ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window (A) if the
setting was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window (A) if the
setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from
step 2.
6
Press L LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
3
Function
2602
(initial setting)
Notes
• Be sure to press and hold L LEARN for at least 3
seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.
Press the numeric buttons (5 ) to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the input
area you want to use.
LEARN
English
115 En
Advanced setup
See page 113 for the operation of the advanced setup menu.
■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP
(Asia and General models only)
Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according
to the frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South
America.
• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.
■ Bi-amplifier setting BI-AMP
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the bi-amplifier
function (see page 19).
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-amplifier
function.
• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-amplifier
function.
Note
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK
terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in
that the SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the
bi-amplifier connection (see page 19).
■ Parameter initialization INITIALIZE
Use this feature to reset the parameters of this unit to the
initial factory settings. You can select the category of
parameters to be initialized.
Choices: DSP PARAM, VIDEO, ALL, CANCEL
• Select “DSP PARAM” to initialize all the parameters
of the sound field parameters (see page 64).
• Select “VIDEO” to initialize the parameters in
“VIDEO SET” (see page 89) and “OSD SHIFT” (see
page 88) and “GRAY BACK” in “DISPLAY SET” (see
page 88).
• Select “ALL” to initialize all the parameters of this
unit.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization
procedure.
Notes
• The advanced setup menu parameters are not initialized.
• Use “INITIALIZE” in the sound field program menu to
initialize the parameters of the desired program (see page 64).
116 En
■ HDMI video monitor check
MONITOR CHECK
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check
function of this unit. When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to
“YES”, this unit receives the information of the available
video signal resolutions from the video monitor connected
via HDMI and you can only select the resolutions
supported by the video monitor in “HDMI SCALING”
(see page 89). When “MONITOR CHECK” is set to
“SKIP”, you can select nay resolution in
“HDMI SCALING”.
Choices: YES, SKIP
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
Problem
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
No sound.
Remedy
See
page
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
33
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
16
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, plug it
back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally.
—
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
24-31
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,
“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.
Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
43
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” while the input source
component outputs digital audio signals.
Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO” or
“COAX/OPT”.
43
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the C INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons (1) on the remote control).
Speaker connections are not secure.
Secure the connections.
16
The volume is turned down.
Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted.
Press D MUTE or B VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output and then adjust the
volume.
44
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
21
“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “OTHER”
and “HDMI” audio signals are not being
played back on this unit.
Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “RX-V1800” in “SET
MENU”.
85
The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” or connect your
source components in the same way as you connect
your video monitor to this unit.
89
This unit outputs the video signals are not
supported on the video monitor connected
to the HDMI OUT jack.
Set the “INITIALIZE” to “VIDEO” to reset the video
parameters.
116
Set “MON.CHK” to “YES”.
116
Pure Direct mode is active.
Turn off the Pure Direct mode.
52
42, 43
117 En
English
Non-standard video signals are input.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
No picture.
Cause
Troubleshooting
Problem
Short message
displays do not
appear on the video
monitor.
Cause
Remedy
See
page
“SHORT MESSAGE” is set to “OFF”.
Set “SHORT MESSAGE” to “ON”.
88
“GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”.
Set “GRAY BACK” to “AUTO”.
88
“VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF”.
Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.
89
The signals input at the HDMI input jacks
are being output at the HDMI OUT jack.
Video signals in the progressive format or
HDTV video signals are being input.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
33, 113
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit.
Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted.
Press D MUTE or B VOLUME +/– on the remote
control to resume audio output.
44
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
16
Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER
LEVEL”.
Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings.
79
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”.
77
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
“7ch Stereo”) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
46
No sound is heard
from the presence
speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off.
Press O STRAIGHT to turn them on.
51
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
42
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SMALL” or “LARGE”.
78
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press O STRAIGHT on the front panel so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
51
Speakers are connected to the
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
Connect the surround speakers to the SURROUND
speaker terminals.
51
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “FRONT” when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
77
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “SWFR” or “FRONT” when a 2channel source is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.
77
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE” and “SUR.B L/R SP” is
automatically set to “NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting
other than “NONE”.
78
“SUR.B L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set
to “NONE”.
Set “SUR.B L/R SP” to a setting other than “NONE”.
78
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
The source does not contain lowfrequency signals.
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
118 En
Troubleshooting
Problem
The audio input
sources cannot be
played in the desired
digital audio signal
format. (Desired input
source indicator or
decoder indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The connected component is not set to
output the desired digital audio signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.
Set the audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
43
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cable of the turntable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
28
The volume level is
low while a record is
being played.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
Connect your turntable to this unit through an MChead amplifier.
28
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
A humming sound is
heard.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
25, 28
Some components cannot record Dolby
Digital or DTS sources.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
28
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”
is set to “ON”.
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
90
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
16
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
119 En
English
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
Troubleshooting
■ Tuner
Problem
Cause
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
FM
AM
Remedy
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
See
page
Check the antenna connections.
32
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
54
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
54
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
55
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
32
Use the manual tuning method.
54
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Supplied AM loop antenna is not
connected.
Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even
if you use an outdoor antenna.
32
Noises can result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
32
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
Remedy
See
page
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
■ HDMI
HDMI ERROR
Cause
DEVICE OVER
The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI
components.
—
HDCP ERROR
HDCP authentication failed.
Check that the connected HDMI components support
the HDCP copy protection standards.
—
HDMI MESSAGE
Out of
Resolution
120 En
Cause
The connected video monitor is not
compatible with the resolution of the input
video signal.
Remedy
Set the resolution of the video output signal of the
input source component appropriately.
See
page
—
Troubleshooting
■ Remote control
Problem
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
The remote control
does not learn new
functions.
Cause
Remedy
See
page
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel.
36
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
5
The operation mode selector is set
incorrectly.
Set the operation mode selector correctly. When
operating this unit, set it to the C AMP position.
When operating the component selected by the input
selector button, set it to the C SOURCE position.
When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO
area, set it to the C TV position.
—
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using
“List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
99
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
99
The library code of the remote control and
the remote control ID of this unit do not
match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit with the
corresponding remote control library code.
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
101
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
—
Memory capacity is full.
Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
106
100, 114
101
5
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
121 En
Troubleshooting
■ iPod
Note
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection of your iPod
(see page 31).
Status message
Loading...
Cause
Remedy
See
page
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
31
Try resetting your iPod.
—
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
—
Unknown type
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
iPod connected
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the
YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.
Disconnected
Your iPod was removed from a Yamaha
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
31
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
—
■ AUTO SETUP
Before AUTO SETUP
Error message
Cause
Remedy
See
page
Connect MIC!
Optimizer microphone is not connected.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
37
Unplug HP!
Headphones are connected.
Unplug the headphones.
—
122 En
Troubleshooting
During AUTO SETUP
Error message
Cause
Remedy
See
page
E-1:NO FRONT SP
Front L/R channel signals are not detected.
Check the front L/R speaker connections.
16
E-2:NO SUR.SP
A surround channel signal is not detected.
Check the surround speaker connections.
16
E-3:NO PRNS SP
A presence channel signal is not detected.
Check the presence speaker connections.
16
E-4:SBR.SBL
Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.
Connect the surround back speaker to the
SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker
terminal if you only have one surround
back speaker.
16
E-5:NOISY
Background noise is too loud.
Try running “AUTO SETUP” in a quiet
environment.
—
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the
optimizer microphone.
—
E-6:CHECK SUR.
Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use
surround back speakers.
17
E-7:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the “AUTO SETUP” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
37
E-8:NO SIGNAL
The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.
Check the microphone setting.
37
Check the speaker connections and
placement.
16
E-9:USER CANCEL
The “AUTO SETUP” procedure was
cancelled due to user activity.
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
37
E-10:INTERNAL ERROR
An internal error occurred.
Run “AUTO SETUP” again.
37
After AUTO SETUP
Warning message
Cause
Remedy
See
page
Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections for proper
polarity (+ or –).
16
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker closer to the listening
position.
—
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive.
Readjust the speaker installation so that all
speakers are set in locations with similar
conditions.
—
Check the speaker connections.
16
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.
37
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Notes
If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “AUTO SETUP” again.
If warning message “W-2” or “W-3” appears, the adjustments are made, however the adjustment may not be optimal.
Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.
If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
English
•
•
•
•
123 En
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
Resetting the system
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
Notes
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup
menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position.
1
Press A MASTER ON/OFF on the front
panel to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
2
Press and hold O STRAIGHT and then
press A MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON
position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and “ADVANCED SETUP”
appears in the front panel display.
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
3
MASTER
INITIALIZE
CANCEL
Press O STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“ALL”.
INITIALIZE
ALL
y
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
• You can initialize the video parameters or sound field
program parameters separately. See page 116 for details.
While holding
down
Rotate the N PROGRAM selector to select
“INITIALIZE”.
124 En
4
5
Press A MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to confirm your
selection and turn off this unit.
GLOSSARY
Glossary
■ Audio and video synchronization
(lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a
technical term that involves both a problem and a
capability of maintaining audio and video signals
synchronized during post-production and transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex
end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an
automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows
devices to perform this synchronization automatically and
accurately without user interaction.
■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a
speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section
of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the
combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement
each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.
This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much
simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence
the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high
pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes
frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above
the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes
frequencies above its cutoff.
■ Component video signal
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in
displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of
the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows
HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to
billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding
for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between
colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many
times more shades of gray between black and white. Also
Deep Color increases the number of available colors
within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color
space.
■ Dialogue normalization
Dialogue Normalization is a feature of Dolby Digital or
DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same
average listening level so that the user does not have to
change the volume control between Dolby Digital or DTS
programs.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
■ Deep Color
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects.
English
125 En
Glossary
■ Dolby Digital Plus
■ Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology
developed for high-definition programming and media
including HD broadcasts, HD DVD, and Blu-ray Disc.
Selected as a mandatory audio standard for HD DVD and
as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete
channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby
Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels
simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and
designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/
amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains
fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio
systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including
HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a mandatory
audio standard for HD DVD and as an optional audio
standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound
that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a
high-definition home theater experience. Supporting
bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8
discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the
optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the
future, Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with
the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the
metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog
normalization and dynamic range control.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game
sources.
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
126 En
■ DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio
signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio
CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at
a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while
noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce
distortion, a common occurrence with very high
quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling
rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered
by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original
96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with fullquality full-motion video for music programs and motion
picture soundtracks on DVD video.
Glossary
■ DTS Digital Surround
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a
home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of
sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital
surround in your home. This system produces practically
distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left and
right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1
(subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit
incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel
reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the
existing 5.1-channel format.
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio
technology developed for high-definition disc-based
media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as a
mandatory audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray
Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit
identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition
home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0
Mbps for HD DVD and up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,
DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete
channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the
optical disc players and AV receivers of the future, DTSHD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS
Digital Surround.
■ DTS Express
DTS Express is an advanced audio technology for the
optional feature on Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD, which
offers high-quality, low bit rate audio optimized for
network streaming, and Internet applications. DTS
Express is used for the Secondary Audio feature of Bluray Disc or the Sub Audio feature of HD DVD. These
features deliver audio commentaries (for example, the
additional commentaries made by the director of a film)
on demand by the users via the Internet, etc. DTS Express
signals are mixed down with the main audio stream on the
player component, and the component sends the mixed
audio stream to the AV receivers/amplifiers via digital
coaxial, digital optical, or analog connections.
■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such
as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video
monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as
multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI
transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure
audio/video interface that meets the security requirements
of content providers and system operators. For further
information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an high resolution
audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based
media including HD DVD and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as
an optional audio standard for both HD DVD and Blu-ray
Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually
indistinguishable from the original, offering a highdefinition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up
to 3.0 Mbps for HD DVD and 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc,
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1
discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the
optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the
future, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains
fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio
systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround.
■ HDMI
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
English
127 En
Glossary
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
128 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION
Sound field program information
■ Elements of a sound field
■ SILENT CINEMA
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field in addition to the
direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s
instrument.
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual
experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your
own home by using the Yamaha original sound field
technology combined with various digital audio systems.
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm
that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects
even without any surround speakers by using virtual
surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual
CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that
does not include a center speaker.
■ Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit
enhances your listening experience by regenerating the
missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result,
flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency
fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of lowfrequency bass is compensated, providing improved
performance of the overall sound system.
■ Sound output from each speaker
Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of
audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the
table below to understand the speaker layout for each
sound field program. For details about the sound output
from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to
“Sound output in each sound field program” in
“APPENDIX” at the end of this manual.
Note
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from
speakers depending on the type of input source being played
back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be
used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of
movies, such as special sound effects, etc.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any
size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is
exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field
processor.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
y
Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you
can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back
speakers (see page 46).
English
129 En
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
Parametric equalizer information
This unit employs Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer (YPAO) technology to optimize the frequency
characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your
listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the
following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor)
to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency
characteristics.
■ Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as
the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the
values 0.5 and 10.
■ Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave
increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.
■ Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB
between –20 and +6 dB.
YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your
listening requirements using a combination of the above
three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each
equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit
has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).
This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as
in Figure 1).
Figure 1
Gain
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Band 1
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic
Figure 2
Gain
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Band 1
Frequency
Band 2
130 En
Original frequency
characteristic
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 130 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 160/195/255/335 W
• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 175 W
• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 180 W
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω ...................................................................................... 0.9 dB
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 130 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω
PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct .......... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to OUT (REC)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .................... 81 dB or more
[Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened)
to Front L/R .............................................. 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 450 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 2.0 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) .......... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) ........................................................ 24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Format (Gray Back)
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC
[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL
• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)
.................................................................................... 60 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB
• Tone Control (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer)
BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ................................................ 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency .......................................... 3.5 kHz
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)
Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB
• Frequency Response
Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω
AM SECTION
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
131 En
English
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
Specifications
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General and Asia models]
....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA
[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less
[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less
[Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]
6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W
• AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)
[Asia, General and China models] ....... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum)
[U.K. model] ...................................... 1 (100 W/0.4 A maximum)
[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm
(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 17-1/4 in)
• Weight ........................................................... 17.0 kg (37 lbs. 8 oz.)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
132 En
Index
■
Numerics
■
A
■
B
B)LFE LEVEL, Sound menu ...............83
B)SP LEVEL, Basic menu ...................79
BASIC MENU, Manual setup ..............77
Basic menu, Manual setup ...................72
Bass cross over, Speaker settings .........78
Battery charge indicator .......................34
BI-AMP, Advanced setup ..................116
Bi-amplifier setting,
Advanced setup ..............................116
Blu-ray Disc player connection ............25
■
C
C)DYNAMIC RANGE,
Sound menu .....................................83
C)MEMORY GUARD,
Option menu .....................................90
C)SP DISTANCE, Basic menu ............80
C.IMAGE, Decoder parameter ............71
Cable plugs ...........................................20
CD player connection ...........................28
CD recorder connection .......................28
Cellar Club,
Sound field programs .......................48
CENTER PRE OUT jack
connection ........................................29
CENTER SP, Speaker settings .............77
Center speaker, Speaker settings ..........77
CENTER WIDTH,
Decoder parameter ...........................71
Chamber, Sound field programs ..........47
Charge on standby, Dock set ................87
Church in Freiburg,
sound field programs ........................47
CINEMA DSP indicator ...................... 35
CLASSICAL,
Sound field programs ...................... 47
CLASSICS, Radio Data System
program type ................................... 59
Clock time, Radio Data System
information ...................................... 58
COMPONENT I/P,
Display settings ............................... 89
Component interlace/progressive upconversion, Display settings ............ 89
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks .............. 20
Compressed Music Enhancer .............. 50
Connection, AM antenna ..................... 32
Connection, Audio components .......... 28
Connection, Blu-ray Disc player ......... 25
Connection, CD player ........................ 28
Connection, CD recorder ..................... 28
Connection,
CENTER PRE OUT jack ................ 29
Connection, DVD player ..................... 26
Connection, DVD recorder .................. 27
Connection, External amplifier ........... 29
Connection, External decoder ............. 30
Connection, FM antenna ..................... 32
Connection,
FRONT PRE OUT jack ................... 29
Connection, HD DVD player .............. 25
Connection, iPod ................................. 31
Connection, MD recorder .................... 28
Connection, Multi-format player ......... 30
Connection, Power cable ..................... 32
Connection, projector .......................... 24
Connection, PVR ................................. 27
Connection, Set-top box ...................... 27
Connection,
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack ....... 29
Connection, SUR.BACK/PRESENCE
PRE OUT jack ................................. 29
Connection,
SURROUND PRE OUT jack .......... 29
Connection, turntable .......................... 28
Connection, TV monitor ...................... 24
Connection, VCR ................................ 27
CROSS OVER, Speaker settings ........ 78
CT, Radio Data System
information ...................................... 58
CULTURE, Radio Data System
program type ................................... 59
■
D
D)INIT. CONFIG ................................ 91
D)LIPSYNC, Sound menu .................. 84
D)TEST TONE, Basic menu ............... 80
Decoder descriptions ........................... 70
Decoder indicators ............................... 35
DECODER MODE,
Initial configuration ......................... 91
Decoder mode,
Initial configuration ......................... 91
133 En
English
A)DISPLAY SET, Option menu ......... 88
A)EQUALIZER, Sound menu ............. 82
A)SPEAKER SET, Basic menu ........... 77
AC OUTLET(S) .................................. 32
Action Game,
Sound field programs ....................... 48
Advanced setup .................................. 113
Advanced sound configurations ........... 64
Adventure, Sound field programs ........ 50
AFFAIRS, Radio Data System
program type .................................... 59
AM antenna connection ....................... 32
AM tuning ............................................ 54
AMP, Operation mode selector ........... 36
Audio and video synchronization,
Sound menu .....................................84
Audio cable plugs .................................20
Audio components connection .............28
Audio information ................................44
Audio input jacks selection ..................43
AUDIO jacks ........................................20
Audio jacks ...........................................20
AUDIO SELECT .................................43
AUDIO SELECT,
Initial configuration .........................91
Audio select, Initial configuration ........91
Audio settings, Sound menu ................84
Audio signal flow .................................23
AUTO DELAY, Lip sync ....................84
Auto delay, Lip sync ............................84
AUTO indicator ...................................35
AUTO SETUP .....................................37
AUTO setup .........................................72
Auto setup ............................................72
Automatic preset tuning,
FM/AM tuning .................................55
Automatic tuning, FM/AM tuning .......54
Available decoders with sound field
programs ..........................................71
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
1 BASIC MENU, Manual setup .......... 72
2 VOLUME MENU, Manual setup ..... 73
2ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 50
2ch Stereo DIRECT,
Sound field parameter ...................... 69
2ch Stereo, Sound field programs ........ 50
2-channel stereo direct, Sound field
parameter ......................................... 69
3 INPUT MENU, Manual setup .......... 74
3 SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........ 73
4 OPTION MENU, Manual setup ....... 74
7ch Enhancer EFFECT LEVEL .......... 69
7ch Enhancer, Sound field program .... 50
7ch Stereo CT LEVEL, Sound field
parameter ......................................... 69
7ch Stereo PL LEVEL, Sound field
parameter ......................................... 69
7ch Stereo PR LEVEL, Sound field
parameter ......................................... 69
7ch Stereo SB LEVEL, Sound field
parameter ......................................... 69
7ch Stereo SL LEVEL, Sound field
parameter ......................................... 69
7ch Stereo SR LEVEL, Sound field
parameter ......................................... 69
7ch Stereo, Sound field programs ........ 50
7-channel Compressed Music Enhancer
effect level,
Sound field parameter ...................... 69
7-channel stereo center speaker level,
Sound field parameter ...................... 69
7-channel stereo presence left speaker
level, Sound field parameter ............ 69
7-channel stereo presence right speaker
level, Sound field parameter ............ 69
7-channel stereo surround back speaker
level, Sound field parameter ............ 69
7-channel stereo surround left speaker
level, Sound field parameter ............ 69
7-channel stereo surround right speaker
level, Sound field parameter ............ 69
96/24 indicator ..................................... 34
Index
DECODER MODE, Input menu ......... 86
Decoder mode, Input menu .................. 86
DIALG.LIFT,
Sound field parameter ...................... 65
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks ................. 20
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks .................. 20
DIMENSION, Decoder parameter ...... 71
DIMMER, Display settings ................. 88
Dimmer, Display settings .................... 88
Display settings, Option menu ............. 88
DIST, Auto setup parameter ................ 38
DRAMA, Radio Data System program
type .................................................. 59
Drama, Sound field programs .............. 50
DSP indicators ..................................... 35
DSP LEVEL, Sound field parameter ... 65
DVD player connection ....................... 26
DVD recorder connection .................... 27
Dynamic range, Sound menu ............... 83
■
E
E)AUDIO SET, Sound menu ............... 84
E)ZONE SET, Option menu ................ 91
EDUCATE, Radio Data System program
type .................................................. 59
Effect sound level,
Sound field parameter ...................... 65
Enhanced other networks data service,
Radio Data System tuning ............... 60
ENHANCER indicator ........................ 35
ENTERTAINMENT, Sound field
programs .......................................... 48
EON data service, Radio Data System
tuning ............................................... 60
EQ TYPE SELECT, Equalizer ............ 82
EQ, Auto setup parameter .................... 40
Equalizer type select, Equalizer ........... 82
Equalizer, Sound menu ........................ 82
EXTD SUR., Initial configuration ....... 91
EXTD SUR., Sound menu ................... 84
Extended surround,
Initial configuration ......................... 91
Extended Surround, Sound menu ........ 84
External amplifier connection .............. 29
External decoder connection ................ 30
■
F
F)HDMI SET, Sound menu ................. 85
FL SCROLL, Display settings ............. 89
FM antenna connection ........................ 32
FM tuning ............................................ 54
Front input,
Multi channel input Setup ............... 87
Front panel display scroll,
Display settings ............................... 89
Front panel door ................................... 36
FRONT PRE OUT connection ............ 29
FRONT SP, Speaker settings ............... 77
Front speakers, Speaker settings .......... 77
FRONT, Multi channel input Setup ..... 87
■
G
GEQ, Equalizer .................................... 82
Graphic equalizer, Equalizer ................ 82
134 En
GRAY BACK, Display settings ........... 88
Gray back, Display settings ................. 88
■
■
■
H
Hall in Amsterdam,
Sound field programs .......................47
Hall in Munich,
Sound field programs .......................47
Hall in Vienna,
Sound field programs .......................47
HD DVD player connection ................. 25
HDMI ...................................................21
HDMI ASPECT ...................................90
HDMI aspect ratio ................................90
HDMI AUTO, Lip sync .......................84
HDMI auto, Lip sync ...........................84
HDMI indicator .................................... 34
HDMI set, Sound menu .......................85
HDMI video monitor,
Advanced setup ..............................116
HEADPHONE, Dynamic range ........... 83
HEADPHONE,
Low frequency effect level .............. 83
Headphones ..........................................43
Headphones indicator ...........................35
Headphones using ................................43
Headphones, Dynamic range ...............83
Headphones,
Low frequency effect level .............. 83
HiFi DSP indicator ...............................35
■
I
I/O ASSIGNMENT, Input menu .........86
INFO, Radio Data System
program type .................................... 59
Infrared window ...................................36
INI.VOL., Audio settings .....................81
INIT.DLY, Sound field parameter .......66
Initial configuration, Option menu .......91
Initial delay,
Sound field parameter ......................66
Initial volume, Audio settings .............. 81
INITIALIZE, Advanced setup ...........116
INPUT CH, Multi channel
input Setup .......................................87
Input channel
and speaker indicators ......................34
Input channel indicators .......................34
Input channels,
Multi channel input Setup ................87
INPUT MENU, Manual setup .............85
Input menu, Manual setup ....................74
INPUT RENAME, Input menu ............86
Input rename, Input menu ....................86
Input signal indicators ..........................35
Input source indicators .........................34
Input sources information display ........44
Input/output assignment,
Input menu .......................................86
iPod connection .................................... 31
iPod controlling .................................... 61
iPod using .............................................61
J
Jacks .....................................................20
L
LEVEL, Auto setup parameter .............40
LFE/BASS OUT, Speaker settings ......77
LFE/Bass out, Speaker settings ............77
LIGHT M, Radio Data System
program type ....................................59
Lip Sync, Sound menu .........................84
LIVE/CLUB,
Sound field programs .......................47
LIVENESS,
Sound field parameter ......................67
Liveness, Sound field parameter ..........67
Low-frequency effect level,
Sound menu ......................................83
LVL, Auto setup parameter ..................38
■
M
M.O.R. M, Radio Data System
program type ....................................59
Macro programming,
remote control ................................105
MANUAL DELAY, Lip sync ..............84
Manual delay, Lip sync ........................84
Manual preset tuning,
FM/AM tuning .................................55
MANUAL SETUP ...............................72
Manual setup ........................................72
Manual tuning, FM/AM tuning ............54
MASTER ON/OFF ...............................33
MAX VOL., Audio settings .................81
Maximum volume ................................81
Maximum volume, Audio settings .......81
MD recorder connection .......................28
Memory guard, Option menu ...............90
MEMORY indicator .............................35
MON.CHK, Advanced setup ..............116
Mono Movie,
Sound field programs .......................50
MOVIE, Sound field programs ............49
MULTI CH INPUT
component selection .........................43
MULTI CH INPUT jacks .....................30
Multi-format player connection ............30
Multi-channel source playback
in 2-channel stereo ...........................53
Multi-channel sources playback with
headphones .......................................51
Multi-information display ....................34
MULTI-ZONE configuration,
Zone2, Zone3 .................................108
MUSIC ENHANCER, Sound field
category ............................................50
Music Video,
Sound field programs .......................49
MUTE ...................................................44
MUTE indicator ...................................34
Muting ..................................................44
■
N
Neo:6 Cinema, Decoder type .........70, 71
Neo:6 Music, Decoder type ..................70
Index
NEWS, Radio Data System
program type .................................... 59
Number of speakers,
Auto setup parameter ....................... 38
■
O
ON SCREEN, Display settings ............ 88
On-screen display time,
Display settings ................................ 88
Operation mode selector ...................... 36
OPTIMIZER MIC jack ........................ 37
Optimizer microphone ......................... 37
OPTION MENU, Manual setup .......... 88
Option menu, Manual setup ................. 74
OSD SHIFT, Display settings .............. 88
OSD shift, Display settings .................. 88
Other components controlling
by Remote control ........................... 98
Other components controlling,
Remote control ................................ 98
OTHER M, Radio Data System
program type .................................... 59
■
P
■
R
Radio Data System tuning ....................58
Radio text, Radio Data System
information .......................................58
RC AMP ID, Advanced setup ............114
RC TUNER ID, Advanced setup .......114
Recital/Opera,
Sound field programs .......................49
Remote control AMP ID,
Advanced setup ..............................114
Remote control code
default settings .................................99
Remote control codes settings ..............99
Remote control TUNER ID,
Advanced setup ..............................114
Remote control using ...........................36
REMOTE IN jack ................................31
REMOTE OUT jack ............................31
REMOTE SENSOR,
Advanced setup ..............................113
Remote sensor, Advanced setup ........113
Repeat, iPod playback ..........................62
Resetting the system ...........................124
REV.DELAY,
Sound field parameter ......................68
REV.LEVEL,
Sound field parameter ......................68
REV.TIME,
Sound field parameter ......................68
Reverberation delay, Sound field
parameter ..........................................68
Reverberation level, Sound field
parameter ..........................................68
Reverberation time,
Sound field parameter ......................68
ROCK M, Radio Data System program
type ...................................................59
Roleplaying Game,
Sound field programs .......................48
ROOM SIZE,
Sound field parameter ......................67
Room size, Sound field parameter .......67
RS-232C STANDBY,
Advanced setup ..............................114
RT, Radio Data System
information .......................................58
■
S
135 En
English
S VIDEO jacks .....................................20
S.INIT.DLY,
Sound field parameter ......................66
S.LIVENESS,
Sound field parameter ......................67
S.ROOM SIZE,
Sound field parameter ..................... 67
SB INI.DLY,
Sound field parameter ..................... 66
SB L/R SP, Speaker settings ............... 78
SB LIVENESS,
Sound field parameter ..................... 67
SB ROOM SIZE,
Sound field parameter ..................... 67
SCIENCE, Radio Data System program
type .................................................. 59
Sci-Fi, Sound field programs ............... 49
Selection, Audio input jacks ................ 43
Selection,
MULTI CH INPUT component ...... 43
Selection, Radio Data System
program type ................................... 59
SET MENU usage ............................... 76
Set-top box connection ........................ 27
Short message display,
Display settings ............................... 88
SHORT MESSAGE,
Display settings ............................... 88
Shuffle iPod playback .......................... 62
SIGNAL INFO .................................... 44
Signal information ............................... 75
SILENT CINEMA ............................... 51
SILENT CINEMA indicator ............... 35
SLEEP indicator .................................. 35
Sleep timer ........................................... 45
Sound field indicators .......................... 35
Sound field parameter changing .......... 64
Sound field programs .......................... 46
Sound field programs selection ........... 46
Sound field programs
with headphones .............................. 51
Sound field programs without surround
speakers ........................................... 51
SOUND MENU, Manual setup ........... 82
Sound menu, Manual setup ................. 73
SOURCE,
Operation mode selector .................. 36
SP, Auto setup parameter .................... 38
Speaker distance,
Auto setup parameter ...................... 38
Speaker distance, Basic menu ............. 80
Speaker distances ................................. 80
SPEAKER IMP.,
Advanced setup ............................. 113
Speaker impedance setting .................. 33
Speaker impedance,
Advanced setup ............................. 113
Speaker level adjusting ........................ 53
Speaker level,
Auto setup parameter ...................... 38
Speaker level, Basic menu ................... 79
Speaker settings, Basic menu .............. 77
SPEAKER, Dynamic range ................. 83
SPEAKER, Low frequency
effect level ....................................... 83
Speakers, Dynamic range .................... 83
Speakers, Low frequency
effect level ....................................... 83
Specifications .................................... 131
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
P.INIT.DLY,
Sound field parameter ...................... 66
P.ROOM SIZE,
Sound field parameter ...................... 67
PANORAMA, Decoder parameter ...... 71
Parameter initialization,
Advanced setup .............................. 116
Parametric equalizer information ....... 130
Parametric equalizer type,
Auto setup parameter ....................... 40
PHONES jack ...................................... 43
PL II Game, Decoder type ................... 70
PL II Movie, Decoder type .................. 70
PL II Music, Decoder type ................... 70
Playback basic procedure ..................... 42
PLIIx Game, Decoder type .................. 70
PLIIx Movie, Decoder type ........... 70, 71
PLIIx Music, Decoder type .................. 70
POP M, Radio Data System
program type .................................... 59
Power cable connection ....................... 32
Presence initial delay, Sound field
parameter ......................................... 66
Presence room size,
Sound field parameter ...................... 67
PRESENCE SP, Speaker settings ........ 78
Presence speaker indicators ................. 34
Presence speakers, Speaker settings .... 78
Presence/Surround back channel priority,
Speaker settings ............................... 79
Preset stations exchange,
FM/AM tuning ................................. 57
Preset stations selection ....................... 56
PRIORITY, Speaker settings ............... 79
PRO LOGIC, Decoder type ................. 70
Program service, Radio Data System
information ...................................... 58
Program type, Radio Data System
information ...................................... 58
Projector connection ............................ 24
PS, Radio Data System
information .......................................58
PTY SEEK mode, Radio Data System
tuning ...............................................59
PTY, Radio Data System
information .......................................58
PURE DIRECT ....................................52
Pure hi-fi sound ....................................52
PVR connection ...................................27
Index
Spectacle, Sound field programs ......... 49
SPORT, Radio Data System
program type .................................... 59
Sports, Sound field programs ............... 48
Standard, Sound field programs ........... 49
STANDBY CHARGE, Dock set ......... 87
Standby mode, Main zone ................... 33
Standby mode, Zone2, Zone3 ............ 110
STEREO indicator ............................... 35
STEREO, Sound field programs .......... 50
STRAIGHT .......................................... 51
Straight Compressed Music Enhancer
effect level,
Sound field parameter ...................... 69
Straight Enhancer EFFECT LEVEL .... 69
STRAIGHT mode ................................ 51
SUBWOOFER PHASE,
Speaker settings ............................... 79
Subwoofer phase, Speaker settings ...... 79
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
connection ........................................ 29
Supplied accessories .............................. 4
SUPPORT AUDIO, HDMI set ............ 85
Support audio, HDMI set ..................... 85
SUR. L/R SP, Speaker settings ............ 78
SUR.BACK/PRESENCE PRE
OUT jack connection ....................... 29
Surround back initial delay,
Sound field parameter ...................... 66
Surround back liveness,
Sound field parameter ...................... 67
Surround back room size,
Sound field parameter ...................... 67
SURROUND DECODE,
Decoder category ............................. 70
Surround initial delay,
Sound field parameter ...................... 66
Surround left/right back speakers,
Speaker settings ............................... 78
Surround left/right speakers,
Speaker settings ............................... 78
Surround liveness,
Sound field parameter ...................... 67
SURROUND PRE OUT jack
connection ........................................ 29
Surround room size,
Sound field parameter ...................... 67
System memory ................................... 75
■
T
Test tone, Basic menu .......................... 80
Test tone, Equalizer ............................. 82
TEST, Equalizer ................................... 82
The Bottom Line,
Sound field programs ...................... 48
The Roxy Theatre,
Sound field programs ...................... 48
Tonal quality adjusting ........................ 52
TONE BYPASS, Audio settings ......... 84
Tone bypass, Audio settings ................ 84
Transmit indicator ................................ 36
Troubleshooting ................................. 117
TUNED indicator ................................. 35
136 En
Tuner frequency step,
Advanced setup ..............................116
TUNER FRQ STEP,
Advanced setup ..............................116
Tuner indicators ...................................35
Turning off ...........................................33
Turning on ............................................33
Turntable connection ............................28
TV controlling by Remote control .......97
TV controlling, Remote control ........... 97
TV monitor connection ........................24
TV, Operation mode selector ...............36
■
U
UNIT, Speaker distance .......................80
Unit, Speaker distance ..........................80
Unprocessed input sources ...................51
■
V
VARIED, Radio Data System
program type .................................... 59
VCR connection ...................................27
Vertical dialogue position,
Sound field parameter ......................65
VIDEO AUX jacks .............................. 31
Video cable plugs ................................. 20
VIDEO CONV., Display settings ........89
Video conversion, Display settings ......89
Video information ................................44
VIDEO jacks ........................................20
Video jacks ...........................................20
Video signal flow ................................. 23
Video sources in the background .........45
Village Vanguard,
Sound field programs .......................47
Virtual CINEMA DSP .........................51
VIRTUAL indicator .............................35
VOLTAGE SELECTOR ........................ 5
VOLUME level indicator .....................34
Volume level,
Auto setup parameter .......................40
Volume menu, Manual setup ...............73
VOLUME TRIM, Input menu .............86
Volume Trim, Input menu ...................86
■
W
Wake on RS-232C access,
Advanced setup ..............................114
Warehouse Loft,
Sound field programs .......................47
■
Y
YPAO indicator .................................... 35
■
Z
Zone set, Option menu .........................91
ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators ..................35
“A MASTER ON/OFF” or
“1 DVD” (example) indicates the
name of the parts on the front panel
or the remote control. Refer to the
attached sheet or the pages at the
end of this manual for the
information about each position of
the parts.
Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland
Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from
whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our
website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident).
The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha
undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge
for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been
discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair.
Conditions
1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a
statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the
product may be returned at the customer’s expense.
2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland.
3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha.
4. The following are excluded from this guarantee:
a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear.
b. Damage resulting from:
(1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party.
(2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to
ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair.
(3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper
use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in
the country where it is used.
(4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control.
(5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products.
(6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety
standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland.
(7) Non AV (Audio Visual) related products.
(Products subject to “Yamaha AV Guarantee Statement” are defined in our website at http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or
http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident.)
5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply.
6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the
product.
7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data.
8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising
from their sales/purchase contract.
English
137 En
■
Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/
Фронтальная панель
A
B
C
M
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
SLEEP
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
ON
OFF
MASTER
Q
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
PRESET/
TUNING
FM/AM
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
SLEEP
EDIT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
PROGRAM
N
i
OPTIMIZER
MIC
O
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
P
■
Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/
Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ
O P
1
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
SELECT
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
TV INPUT
MUTE
SOURCE
TV MUTE
2
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
3
8
9
0
A
B
C
TV
D
SET MENU
TITLE
7
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO
ENTER
E
F
G
M
A/B/C/D/E
4
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
3
H
I
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
3
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
5
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
5
7
6
MOVIE
5
6
7
MOVIE
8
8
STEREO ENHANCER
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
+ 10
ENT
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
J
K
0
9
APPENDIX
6
4
4
N
REC
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
L
ii
Sound output in each sound field program
Son émis dans chaque correction de champ sonore
Klangausgabe in jedem soundfeldprogramm
Ljudutmatning för varje ljudfältsprogram
Geluidsweergave in elk van de geluidsveldprogramma’s
Воспроизведение звучания для каждой программы звукового поля
L
Front left speaker
SL
Surround left speaker
SBR
Surround back right speaker
C
Center speaker
SR
Surround right speaker
PL
Presence left speaker
R
Front right speaker
SBL
Surround back left speaker
PR
Presence right speaker
Speaker from which no sound is being output
Speaker from which sound is being output
Speaker settings
7-channel
PL
L
Speaker settings
5-channel
PL
PR
C
R
L
C
R
L
5-channel
PR
C
R
L
SR
SL
C
R
5
1
SL
SBL SBR
PL
L
SR
SL
SL
SR
R
SBL SBR
PL
PR
C
L
C
L
R
SR
PR
C
R
L
SR
SL
C
R
6
2
SL
SBL SBR
PL
L
SR
SL
SL
SR
R
SBL SBR
PL
PR
C
L
C
L
R
SR
PR
C
R
L
SR
SL
C
R
7
3
SL
SBL SBR
PL
L
SR
SL
SL
SR
R
SBL SBR
PL
PR
C
L
C
L
R
SR
PR
C
R
L
SR
SL
C
R
8
4
SL
iii
7-channel
SBL SBR
SR
SL
SR
SL
SBL SBR
SR
*1
EX
/
PL x
/
: OFF
*2
EX
/
PL x
/
: ON or discrete 6.1/7.1-channel audio signals are input.
Input audio source
Program
PRIORITY
2-channel
(monaural)
2-channel
(stereo)
5.1-channel*1
6.1/7.1-channel*2
1
1
2
4
1
1
2
4
3
2
2
4
7
4
2
4
CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich
Hall in Vienna
Hall in Amsterdam
Church in Freiburg
Chamber
LIVE/CLUB
Village Vanguard
Warehouse Loft
Cellar Club
The Roxy Theatre
The Bottom Line
PRNS
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
Music Video
Recital/Opera
Action Game
Roleplaying Game
MOVIE
STANDARD
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
Drama
PRNS
MOVIE
Mono Movie
PRNS
3
2
2
4
SB
3
2
2
4
STEREO
2ch Stereo
PRNS/SB
5
5
5
5
STEREO
7ch Stereo
MUSIC ENHANCER
7ch Enhancer
PRNS/SB
4
4
4
4
SUR.DECODE
Sur. Decode
(Pro Logic)
(PLII Movie)
(PLII Game)
PRNS/SB
6
7
7
4
SUR.DECODE
Sur. Decode
(PLII Music)
PRNS/SB
8
7
7
4
SUR.DECODE
Sur. Decode
(PLIIx Movie)
(PLIIx Game)
(Neo:6 Cinema)
PRNS/SB
6
4
7
4
SUR.DECODE
Sur. Decode
(PLIIx Music)
(Neo:6 Music)
PRNS/SB
8
4
7
4
STRAIGHT
Pure Direct
MUSIC ENHANCER
Straight Enhancer
PRNS/SB
5
5
7
4
SB
SB
APPENDIX
iv
List of remote control codes
Liste des codes de commande
Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder
Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes
Список кодов дистанционного управления
CABLE
ABC
0030, 0035
AMERICAST 0926
BELL SOUTH 0926
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
0303
BRITISH TELECOM 0030
CABLE & WIRELESS
1095
DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
DIRECTOR
0503
FILMNET
0470
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837,
GOLDSTAR 0171
HAMLIN
0036, 0300
JERROLD
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837
LG
0171
MNET
0470
MEMOREX
0027
MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,
1133
NTL
1095
NOOS
0844
ONO
1095
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
0030
PACE
0264, 1087, 1095
PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134
PARAGON
0027
PHILIPS
0332, 0344
PIONEER
0171, 0560, 0904,
1904
PULSAR
0027
QUASAR
0027
REGAL
0300, 0306
RUNCO
0027
SAGEM
0844
SAMSUNG
0027, 0171
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
SONY
1033
STARCOM
0030
SUPERCABLE
0303
TS
0030
TELE+1
0470
TELEWEST
1095
TORX
0030
TOSHIBA
0027
TRANS PX
0303
UNITED CABLE
0030
ZENITH
0027, 0552, 0926
CD PLAYER
AIWA
0184
ARCAM
0184
AUDIO RESEARCH 0184
v
AUDIO TON 0184
AUDIOLAB
0184
AUDIOMECA 0184
CAIRN
0184
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
0056
CARVER
0184, 0206
CYRUS
0184
DKK
0027
DMX ELECTRONICS
0184
DENON
0900
DYNAMIC BASS
0206
EMERSON
0332
FISHER
0206
GENEXXA
0059, 0332
GOODMANS 0332
GRUNDIG
0184
HARMAN/KARDON
0184, 0200
HITACHI
0059
JVC
0099
KENWOOD
0055, 0064
KRELL
0184
LXI
0332
LINN
0184
MCS
0056
MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332
MARANTZ
0056, 0184
MATSUI
0184
MEMOREX
0332
MERIDIAN
0184
MICROMEGA 0184
MIRO
0027
MISSION
0184
MYRYAD
0184
NAD
0027
NSM
0184
NAIM
0184
OPTIMUS
0027, 0059, 0064,
0206, 0332
PANASONIC 0056
PHILIPS
0184
PIONEER
0059, 0332
POLK AUDIO 0184
PROTON
0184
QED
0184
QUAD
0184
QUASAR
0056
RCA
0059, 0206, 0332
REALISTIC
0206
REVOX
0184
ROTEL
0184
SAE
0184
SANSUI
0184, 0332
SANYO
0206
SCOTT
0332
SEARS
0332
SHARP
0064
SIMAUDIO
0184
SONIC FRONTIERS 0184
SONY
0027
SYMPHONIC 0332
TAG MCLAREN
0184
TANDY
TECHNICS
THORENS
THULE
UNIVERSUM
VICTOR
WARDS
YAMAHA
0059
0056
0184
0184
0184
0099
0184
2300, 2301
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD
MARANTZ
PHILIPS
YAMAHA
0653
0653
0653
2400
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
0757
ALBA
0744
AMSTRAD
0740
APEX DIGITAL
0699, 0744,
0782, 0821, 0823,
0857, 1127
BLAUPINKT 0744
BLUE PARADE
0598
BUSH
0740
CENTREX
0699
CLATRONIC 0815
CYBERHOME 0741
DVD2000
0548
DAEWOO
0811, 0797
DANSAI
0797
DECCA
0797
DENON
0517
DIAMOND
0795
DIGITREX
0699
EMERSON
0618
ENTERPRISE 0618
FISHER
0697
GE
0549, 0744
GO VIDEO
0742
GOLDSTAR 0768
GRADIENTE 0678
GREENHILL 0744
GRUNDIG
0566
HITACHI
0600, 0691
HITEKER
0699
JVC
0585, 0650
KLH
0744
KENWOOD
0517, 0561
KOSS
0678
LG
0768
LIMIT
0795
MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702
MARANTZ
0566
MEMOREX
0858
MICO
0750
MICROSOFT 0549
MINTEK
0744
MITSUBISHI 0548
MUSTEK
0757
NESA
0744
ONKYO
ORITRON
PALSONIC
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
0530
0678
0699
0517, 0659, 1389
0530, 0566, 0673,
0881
PIONEER
0552, 0598, 0658,
0659
POLK AUDIO 0566
PROSCAN
0549
QWESTAR
0678
RCA
0549, 0598, 0744
ROTEL
0650
SM ELECTRONIC 0757
SAMSUNG
0600
SANYO
0697
SHARP
0657
SHERWOOD 0797
SHINSONIC 0560
SLIM ART
0811
SONY
0560, 0891
SYLVANIA
0702
TATUNG
0797
TEAC
0598, 0744
TECHNICS
0517
THETA DIGITAL
0598
THOMSON
0549
TOSHIBA
0530
URBAN CONCEPTS 0530
XBOX
0549
YAMAHA
0517, 0566, 0572,
2100
ZENITH
0530, 0618, 0768
ZEUS
0811
HD DVD PLAYER
TOSHIBA
2103
DVD RECORDER
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
SHARP
SONY
YAMAHA
2800, 2801, 2802
2808
2812, 2813
2809, 2810, 2811
2807
Blu-lay Disc player
PANASONIC
SAMSUNG
2800, 2801, 2802
2816
LD PLAYER
CARVER
DENON
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
NAD
NAGSMI
OPTIMUS
PHILIPS
PIONEER
SALORA
SONY
TELEFUNKEN
0091
0086
0091
0086
0086
0086
0086
0091
0086
0091
0228
0086
YAMAHA
2200
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD
ONKYO
SHARP
SONY
YAMAHA
0708
0895
0888
0517
2500, 2501, 2502
THORENS
UHER
VENTURER
VICTOR
WARDS
YAMAHA
1216
0558
1417
0101
0041, 0185
0203, 1203, 1358,
2601
(TUNER ID1)
2602
(TUNER ID2)
2603
(iPod)
2606
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC
AIWA
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT
1327
ABSAT
0150
ALBA
0482
ALPHASTAR 0799
AMSTRAD
0874
ASTON
0169, 1156
ASTRO
0200
ATSAT
1327
AVALON
0423
BLAUPUNKT 0200
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
0874, 1202
CANAL DIGITAL
0880
CANAL SATELLITE 0880
CANAL+
0880
CHAPARRAL 0243
CITYCOM
1203
CONNEXIONS
0423
CROSSDIGITAL
1136
CYRUS
0227
D-BOX
0750, 1154
DMT
1102
DNT
0227, 0423
DAERYUNG 0423
DAEWOO
1323
DIGENIUS
0326
DIRECTV
0274, 0419, 0593,
0666, 0751, 0776,
0846, 1103, 1136,
1169, 1776, 1883
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
0802, 1032
DISHPRO
0802, 1032
DISTRATEL 0111
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
1264
ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,
0802, 0880, 0898,
1032, 1113
ENGEL
1044
EXPRESSVU 0802
FTE
0890
FINLUX
0482
FRACARRO 0898
FUBA
0423
GE
0593
GOI
0802
GALAXIS
0890, 1138
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0896
GOLD BOX
0880
GRUNDIG
0200, 0874
HTS
0802
HIRSCHMANN
0200, 0423
HITACHI
0482, 0846
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
0776, 1169, 1776
HUMAX
0890, 1203
INVIDEO
0898
JVC
0802
KATHREIN
0150, 0200, 0227,
0276, 0685, 1248
TAPE DECK
AIWA
CARVER
GRUNDIG
0056
0056
0056
HARMAN/KARDON
0056
MAGNAVOX 0056
MARANTZ
0056
MYRYAD
0056
OPTIMUS
0054
PHILIPS
0056
PIONEER
0054
POLK AUDIO 0056
RCA
0054
REVOX
0056
SANSUI
0056
SONY
0270
THORENS
0056
WARDS
0054
YAMAHA
2700,2701
TV
AGB
AOC
0543
0036, 0057, 0087,
0119, 0120, 0135,
0205, 0207, 0478
ASA
0131
AWA
0036
ACURA
0036
ADDISON
0119, 0135, 0680
ADMIRAL
0120, 0190, 0490
ADVENT
0788
AIKO
0119
AKAI
0036, 0057, 0235,
0388, 0543, 0729,
0839
AKURA
0291
ALBA
0036, 0064, 0398,
0695
AMERICA ACTION 0207
AMPRO
0778
AMSTRAD
0036, 0064, 0198,
0398, 0439, 0460,
0543
ANAM
0036, 0207, 0277
ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677
ANITECH
0036
APEX DIGITAL
0775, 0792,
0794
AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136
BANG & OLUFSEN 0592
BASIC
0036
BAUR
0064, 0388, 0539
BAYSONIC
0207
BEAUMARK 0205
BEKO
0397, 0513, 0741,
0742
BELL & HOWELL 0181
BEON
0064
BLAUPUNKT 0222
BLUE SKY
0695, 1064
BONDSTEC 0274
BRADFORD 0207
BRANDT
0136, 0362
BROKSONIC 0263, 0490
BUSH
0036, 0064, 0398,
0401, 0695, 1064
CCE
0064
CGE
0274
CTC
0274
CXC
0207
CANDLE
0057
CARNIVALE 0057
CARVER
0081, 0197
CASCADE
0036
CATHAY
0064
CELEBRITY 0027
CELERA
0792
vi
APPENDIX
0558
0185, 1116, 1415,
1432, 1668
ALCO
1417
ANAM
1636
APEX DIGITAL
1284
AUDIOLAB
1216
AUDIOTRONIC
1216
AUDIOVOX 1417
BOSE
1256
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
1397
CAPETRONIC 0558
CARVER
1116, 1216
CENTREX
1284
DENON
1387
FERGUSON 0558
FINE ARTS
1216
GRUNDIG
1216
HARMAN/KARDON
0137, 1331
INTEGRA
0162, 1325
JBL
0137, 1333
JVC
0101, 0558, 1401,
1522
KLH
1417, 1439
KENWOOD
1054, 1340
MCS
0066
MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,
1296,
MARANTZ
0066, 1116, 1216,
1316
MICROMEGA 1216
MUSICMAGIC
1116
MYRYAD
1216
NAD
0347
NORCENT
1416
ONKYO
0162, 0869, 1325
OPTIMUS
0558, 1050
PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,
1790
PHILIPS
1116, 1216, 1293,
1295, 1296, 1310,
1316
PIONEER
0041, 0558, 1050,
1411
POLK AUDIO 1316
PROSCAN
1281
QUASAR
0066
RCA
0558, 1050, 1281,
1417, 1636,
SABA
0558
SANSUI
1116
SCHNEIDER 0558
SONY
0185, 1085, 1185,
1685, 1785
STEREOPHONICS 1050
SUNFIRE
1340
TEAC
1417
TECHNICS
0066, 1335, 1336,
1545
TELEFUNKEN
0558
THOMSON
1281
KREISELMEYER
0200
LABGEAR
1323
LOGIX
1044
LORENZEN 0326
MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751
MANHATTAN
0482, 1044,
1110
MARANTZ
0227
MEDIASAT
0880
MEMOREX
0751
METRONIC
0111
MITSUBISHI 0776
MOTOROLA 0896
MYRYAD
0227
NEXT LEVEL 0896
NOKIA
0482, 0750, 0778,
1154, 1250, 1750
OCTALTV
1032
ORBITECH
1127
PACE
0482, 0874, 1202,
1350
PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,
1347
PANDA
0482
PAYSAT
0751
PHILIPS
0160, 0227, 0482,
0749, 0751, 0776,
0880, 1103, 1169,
1776
PIONEER
0880
PROMAX
0482
PROSCAN
0419, 0593
RCA
0170, 0419, 0593,
0882
RFT
0227
RADIOSHACK
0896
RADIOLA
0227
RADIX
0423
SKY
0874, 0883, 1202
SM ELECTRONIC 1227
SABRE
0482
SAGEM
0847, 1141, 1280
SAMSUNG
1044, 1136, 1303,
1319
SAT CONTROL
1327
SATSTATION 1110
SCHWAIGER 1138
SEEMANN
0423
SIEMENS
0200
SONY
0666, 0874, 1666
STAR CHOICE
0896
STRONG
1327
TPS
0847, 1280
TANTEC
0482
TECHNISAT 1126, 1127
TELESTAR
1127
THOMSON
0482, 0880, 1073,
1318
TOPFIELD
1233
TOSHIBA
0776, 0817, 1776
ULTIMATETV
0419, 0666
UNIDEN
0749, 0751
UNIVERSUM 0200
VENTANA
0227
WISI
0200, 0423, 0482
XSAT
0150
ZEHNDER
1102
ZENITH
0883, 1883
CENTURION 0064
CHANGHONG
0792
CHING TAI
0036, 0119
CHUN YUN
0027, 0036, 0119,
0207
CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207
CIMLINE
0036
CINERAL
0119, 0478
CITIZEN
0057, 0087, 0119
CLARION
0207
CLARIVOX
0064
CLATRONIC 0274, 0397
CONDOR
0347, 0397
CONRAC
0835
CONTEC
0036, 0207
CRAIG
0207
CROSLEY
0081
CROWN
0036, 0064, 0207,
0397, 0445
CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,
0081, 0087, 0120,
0172, 0181, 0193,
0478, 0729, 1174,
1374
DAEWOO
0036, 0057, 0064,
0119, 0135, 0181,
0197, 0205, 0207,
0401, 0478, 0650,
0661, 1688
DANSAI
0064
DAYTON
0036
DE GRAAF
0235, 0575
DECCA
0064, 0543
DENON
0172
DIGATRON
0064
DIXI
0036, 0064
DUMONT
0044
DWIN
0747, 0801
ECE
0064
ELBE
0286
ELECTROBAND
0027
ELIN
0064, 0575
ELITE
0347
ELTA
0036
EMERSON
0181, 0205, 0207,
0263, 0388, 0490,
0650
ENVISION
0057,0840
EPSON
0860
ERRES
0064
ETHER
0036, 0057
ETRON
0036
EUROPHON 0543
FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,
0265, 0314, 0362,
0587
FIDELITY
0388
FINLANDIA 0235, 0373
FINLUX
0064, 0131, 0132,
0373, 0543
FIRSTAR
0036, 0263
FIRSTLINE
0036, 0274, 0695
FISHER
0131, 0181, 0235,
0397
FLINT
0482
FORMENTI
0064, 0347
FORTRESS
0120
FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291
FUJITSU
0710, 0836
FUNAI
0207, 0198, 0291
FUTURETECH
0207
GE
0057, 0074, 0078,
0119, 0205, 0207,
0478, 0587, 1174,
1374, 1481
vii
GEC
GATEWAY
GELOSO
GENEXXA
GIBRALTER
GOLDSTAR
0064, 0543
1782, 1783
0036
0190
0044, 0057
0057, 0064, 0136,
0181, 0205, 0404
GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,
0661
GOREMJE
0397
GRADIENTE 0080, 0197
GRAETZ
0190, 0388
GRANADA
0064, 0235, 0366,
0543
GRANDIN
0637
GRUNDIG
0064, 0222, 0514,
0583, 0614
GRUNPY
0207
HCM
0036, 0439
HALLMARK 0205
HANKOOK
0057, 0205, 0207
HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,
0455, 0583
HANTAREX 0543
HARMAN/KARDON 0081
HARVARD
0207
HAVERMY
0120
HELLO KITTY
0478
HINARI
0036, 0064
HISAWA
0482
HITACHI
0036, 0057, 0119,
0132, 0136, 0172,
0190, 0205, 0252,
0383, 0508, 0575,
0605, 1172, 1283
HUA TUN
0036
HUANYU
0401
HYPSON
0064, 0291
ICE
0291, 0398
ITS
0398
ITT
0190, 0388, 0575
IMPERIAL
0274, 0397, 0445
INDIANA
0064
INFINITY
0081
INGELEN
0190
INNO HIT
0543
INNOVA
0064
INTEQ
0044
INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,
0388, 0539
INTERVISION
0064, 0291,
0404
JBL
0081
JCB
0027
JVC
0080, 0398, 0490,
0680, 0710
JEAN
0036, 0078, 0119,
0183, 0263
JENSEN
0788
KEC
0207
KTV
0057, 0207
KAISUI
0036
KAPSCH
0190
KARCHER
0637
KATHREIN
0583
KENDO
0064
KENWOOD
0057
KNEISSEL
0286, 0462
KOLIN
0080, 0135, 0207
KORPEL
0064
KOYODA
0036
L&S ELECTRONIC 0835
LG
0057, 0064, 0087,
0135, 0205, 0741
LXI
0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0205
LEYCO
0064, 0291
LIESENK & TTER 0064
LOEWE
0539
LUXOR
0383, 0388
M ELECTRONIC
0036, 0064,
0131, 0132, 0136,
0190, 0314, 0373,
0401, 0507
MGA
0057, 0177, 0205
MTC
0057, 0087, 0539
MAGNADYNE
0274, 0543
MAGNAFON 0543
MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,
1481
MANESTH
0291, 0347
MARANTZ
0057, 0064, 0081,
0583
MARK
0064
MATSUI
0036, 0064, 0235,
0398, 0514, 0543
MATSUSHITA
0277, 0677
MEDIATOR 0064
MEDION
0695, 0835, 1064
MEGATRON 0172, 0205
MEMOREX
0036, 0177, 0181,
0205, 0277, 0490,
1064
METZ
0474
MICROMAXX
0835
MICROSTAR 0835
MIDLAND
0044, 0074, 0078
MINERVA
0514
MINOKA
0439
MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,
0177, 0181, 0205,
0207, 0263, 0277,
0539, 0863, 1277
MIVAR
0318,0319, 0543,
0636
MOTOROLA 0120
MULTITECH 0036, 0207
MYRYAD
0583
NAD
0183, 0205, 0388,
0893
NEC
0036, 0057, 0078,
0181, 0183, 0197,
0205, 0482, 0524,
1731
NEI
0064
NTC
0119
NECKERMANN
0064, 0583
NETSAT
0064
NEWAVE
0036, 0119, 0120,
0205
NIKKAI
0064, 0291
NIKKO
0057, 0119, 0205
NOKIA
0388, 0500, 0507,
0575, 0658
NORCENT
0775, 0851
NORDMENDE
0136, 0314,
0587
OCEANIC
0190, 0388
ONWA
0207, 0460
OPTIMUS
0181, 0193, 0277,
0677
OPTONICA
0120
ORION
0064, 0263, 0347,
0490, 0543
OSAKI
0291, 0439
OTTO VERSAND
0064, 0347,
0539, 0583
PALLADIUM 0397, 0445
PANAMA
0291
PANASONIC
0064, 0078, 0081,
0190, 0277, 0677,
1437
PATHE CINEMA
0265, 0347
PAUSA
0036
PENNEY
0057, 0074, 0078,
0087, 0183, 0205,
1374
PERDIO
0347
PHILCO
0057, 0064, 0081,
0172, 0205, 0207,
0274, 0490, 1688
PHILIPS
0027, 0057, 0064,
0078, 0081, 0119,
0135, 0205, 0401,
0583, 0717, 1481
PHONOLA
0064
PILOT
0057
PIONEER
0136, 0190, 0193,
0314, 0706, 0787,
0893
PORTLAND 0119
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0543
PRIMA
0788
PRISM
0078
PROFEX
0036, 0388
PROSCAN
0074
PROTECH
0036, 0064, 0274,
0291, 0445, 0695
PROTON
0036, 0057, 0205
PULSAR
0044
QUASAR
0078, 0277, 0677
QUELLE
0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
R-LINE
0064
RCA
0027, 0057, 0074,
0117, 0119, 0205,
0706, 1074, 1174,
1274, 1374, 1474,
1481, 1574
RFT
0455
RADIOSHACK
0057, 0074,
0181, 0205, 0207
RADIOLA
0064
RADIOMARELLI
0543
REALISTIC
0057, 0181, 0205,
0207
REDIFFUSION
0388
REOC
0741
REVOX
0064
REX
0190, 0286, 0291
ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445
RUNCO
0044, 0057, 0524,
0630
SBR
0064
SEG
0291, 0695
SEI
0543
SKY
0064
SSS
0207
SABA
0136, 0190, 0314,
0362
SACCS
0265
SAGEM
0637
SAISHO
0036, 0291, 0543
SALORA
0190, 0380, 0388,
0575
SAMBERS
0543
SAMPO
0036, 0057, 0119,
0120, 0181, 0198,
0205, 0677, 1782
SAMSUNG
TELEFUNKEN
0136, 0289,
0362, 0652, 0729
TELEMEISTER
0347
TELETECH
0036
TENSAI
0347
TERA
0057
THOMSON
0136, 0314, 0587,
0652, 1474
THORN
0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
TOSHIBA
0087, 0181, 0183,
0535, 0645, 0677,
0859, 1283, 1383,
1683, 1731
TRIUMPH
0543
TUNTEX
0036, 0057, 0119
UHER
0347
UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,
0291, 0373, 0397,
0519
VECTOR RESEARCH
0057
VESTEL
0064
VICTOR
0080, 0277, 0677,
0680
VIDEOSAT
0274
VIDIKRON
0081
VIDTECH
0205
VIEWSONIC 1782
VISION
0347
VOXSON
0190
WALTHAM
0383
WARDS
0057, 0081, 0205,
0893
WATSON
0064, 0347
WAYCON
0183
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0064, 0347, 0490,
0650
YAMAHA
0057, 0172, 0677,
0796, 0860,
2900 (projector),
2901 (projector),
2903,
2904 (projector)
YAPSHE
0277
YOKO
0064, 0291
ZENITH
0044, 0119, 0205,
0490
VCR
ASA
ADMIRAL
ADVENTURA
AIKO
AIWA
0064, 0108
0075
0027
0305
0027, 0064, 0334,
0375, 0379
AKAI
0068, 0342
AKIBA
0099
ALBA
0099, 0305, 0342,
0379
AMERICA ACTION 0305
AMERICAN HIGH 0062
AMSTRAD
0027
ANAM
0064, 0253, 0267,
0305, 0507
ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589
ANITECH
0099
ASHA
0267
ASUKA
0064
AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305
BAIRD
0027, 0068, 0131
BASIC LINE 0099, 0305
BEAUMARK 0267
BELL & HOWELL 0131
BLAUPUNKT 0253
BRANDT
0347
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
0068
BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506
BUSH
0099, 0305, 0379
CCE
0099, 0305
CGE
0027
CALIX
0064
CANON
0062
CARVER
0108
CIMLINE
0099
CINERAL
0305
CITIZEN
0064, 0305, 1305
COLT
0099
COMBITECH 0379
CRAIG
0064, 0074, 0099,
0267
CROWN
0099, 0305
CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,
0087, 1062
CYBERNEX 0267
CYRUS
0108
DAEWOO
0072, 0131, 0305,
0669, 1305
DANSAI
0099
DE GRAAF
0069
DECCA
0027, 0108
DENON
0069
DUAL
0068
DUMONT
0027, 0108, 0131
DYNATECH 0027
ESC
0267, 0305
ELCATECH
0099
ELECTROHOME
0064
ELECTROPHONIC 0064
EMEREX
0059
EMERSON
0027, 0062, 0064,
0070, 0072, 0211,
0267, 0305, 1305,
1506
FERGUSON 0068, 0347
FIDELITY
0027
FINLANDIA 0108, 0131
FINLUX
0027, 0069, 0108,
0131
FIRSTLINE
0064, 0070, 0072,
0099
FISHER
0074, 0131
FUJI
0060, 0062
FUJITSU
0027, 0072
FUNAI
0027
GE
0062, 0087, 0267,
0834, 1062, 1087
GEC
0108
GARRARD
0027
GENERAL
0072
GO VIDEO
0459
GOLDHAND 0099
GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,
1264
GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,
0305
GRADIENTE 0027
GRAETZ
0068, 0131, 0267
GRANADA
0108, 0131
GRANDIN
0027, 0064, 0099
GRUNDIG
0099, 0108, 0253,
0374
HCM
0099
HI-Q
0074
HANSEATIC 0064
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0027
HARMAN/KARDON 0108
HARWOOD
0099
HINARI
0099, 0267, 0379
HITACHI
0027, 0064, 0068,
0069, 0267
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0069
HYPSON
0099
ITT
0068, 0131, 0267
ITV
0064, 0305
IMPERIAL
0027
INTERFUNK 0108
JVC
0068, 0072, 0094
JENSEN
0068
KEC
0064, 0305
KLH
0099
KAISUI
0099
KENWOOD
0068, 0094
KODAK
0062, 0064
KOLIN
0068, 0070
KORPEL
0099
LG
0064, 0069, 0072,
0507
LXI
0064
LENCO
0305
LEYCO
0099
LLOYD’S
0027
LOEWE
0064, 0108, 1589
LOGIK
0099, 0267
LUXOR
0070, 0075, 0131
M ELECTRONIC
0027
MEI
0062
MGA
0070, 0267
MGN TECHNOLOGY
0267
MTC
0027, 0267
MAGNASONIC
1305
MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,
0108, 1808
MAGNIN
0267
MANESTH
0072, 0099
MARANTZ
0062, 0108
MARTA
0064
MATSUI
0375, 0379
MATSUSHITA
0062
MEDION
0375
MEMOREX
0027, 0062, 0064,
0066, 0074, 0075,
0131, 0267, 0334,
0375, 1264
MEMPHIS
0099
METZ
0064, 0374, 1589
MINOLTA
0069
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,
0108, 0834
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075
MULTITECH 0027, 0099
MURPHY
0027
MYRYAD
0108
NAD
0131
NEC
0062, 0064, 0068,
0075, 0094, 0131
NATIONAL
0253
NECKERMANN
0108
NESCO
0099
NEWAVE
0064
NIKKO
0064
NOBLEX
0267
NOKIA
0068, 0131, 0267
NORDMENDE
0068, 0347
OCEANIC
0027, 0068
OKANO
0342, 0375
OLYMPUS
0062, 0253
OPTIMUS
0064, 0075, 0131,
0459
viii
APPENDIX
0036, 0057, 0064,
0087, 0117, 0119,
0181, 0205, 0291,
0397, 0583, 0614,
0645, 0729, 0793,
0839, 0841
SANSEI
0478
SANSUI
0490
SANYO
0131, 0181, 0207,
0235, 0366, 0826
SCHAUB LORENZ 0388
SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,
0695
SCOTCH
0205
SCOTT
0205, 0207, 0263
SEARS
0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0198, 0205
SELECO
0190, 0286
SEMIVOX
0207
SEMP
0183
SHARP
0057, 0120, 0677
SHEN YING 0036, 0119
SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263
SIAREM
0543
SIEMENS
0064, 0222
SINUDYNE
0543
SKANTIC
0383
SKYGIANT
0207
SKYWORTH 0064
SOLAVOX
0190
SONITRON
0235
SONOKO
0036, 0064
SONOLOR
0190, 0235
SONTEC
0064
SONY
0027, 0677, 0861,
1127, 1532, 1678
SOUNDESIGN
0205, 0207
SOUNDWAVE
0064, 0445
SOWA
0078, 0087, 0119,
0183, 0205
SQUAREVIEW
0198
STANDARD 0036
STARLITE
0207
STERN
0190, 0286
SUPREME
0027
SYLVANIA
0057, 0081, 0198
SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207
SYNCO
0027, 0087, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0478
SYSLINE
0064
T+A
0474
TCM
0835
TMK
0205
TNCI
0044
TVS
0490
TACICO
0036, 0119, 0205
TAI YI
0036
TANDY
0120, 0190
TASHIKO
0119, 0677
TATUNG
0036, 0064, 0078,
0081, 0087, 0181,
0183, 0543
TEAC
0036, 0064, 0291,
0439, 0445, 0482,
0695, 1064
TEC
0274
TECHNEMA 0347
TECHNICS
0078, 0277, 0677
TECHWOOD 0078
TECO
0036, 0078, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0291,
0680
TEKNIKA
0081, 0087, 0119,
0177, 0207
ORION
0211, 0375, 0379,
1506
OSAKI
0027, 0064, 0099
OTTO VERSAND
0108
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,
0643, 1062, 1589
PATHE MARCONI 0068
PENNEY
0062, 0064, 0069,
0267, 1062, 1264
PENTAX
0069
PERDIO
0027
PHILCO
0062
PHILIPS
0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA
0108
PILOT
0064
PIONEER
0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC
0267
PROLINE
0027
PROSCAN
0087, 1087
PROTEC
0099
PULSAR
0066
PYE
0108
QUASAR
0062, 1062
QUELLE
0108
RCA
0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK
0027
RADIOLA
0108
RADIX
0064
RANDEX
0064
REALISTIC
0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC
0375
REPLAYTV
0641, 0643
REX
0068
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO
0066
SBR
0108
SEG
0267
SEI
0108
STS
0069
SABA
0068, 0347
SALORA
0070
SAMPO
0064, 0075
SAMSUNG
0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY
0066, 0075
SANSUI
0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO
0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE
0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT
0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS
0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO
0068
SEMP
0072
SHARP
0075, 0834
SHINTOM
0099, 0131
SIEMENS
0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA
0064
SINGER
0072, 0099
SINUDYNE
0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC
0064
SONY
0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI
0375
ix
SUNSTAR
SUNTRONIC
SYLVANIA
0027
0027
0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK
0267
TANDY
0027, 0131
TASHIKO
0027, 0064
TATUNG
0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC
0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS
0062, 0253
TECO
0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA
0027, 0062, 0064
TELEAVIA
0068
TELEFUNKEN
0068, 0347
TENOSAL
0099
TENSAI
0027
THOMAS
0027
THOMSON
0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN
0068, 0131
TIVO
0645, 0663
TOSHIBA
0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER
0267
UNITECH
0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR
0072
VICTOR
0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC
0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN
0027
WARDS
0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000
0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA
0068
YAMISHI
0099
YOKAN
0099
YOKO
0267
ZENITH
0027, 0060, 0066,
1506
RX-V1800_G-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 6, 2007 6:13 PM
G
RX-V1800
© 2007
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia
WK69330
RX-V1800
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
A
ON
OFF
MASTER
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
B
INPUT
C
N
AUDIO
SELECT
PROGRAM
TONE
CONTROL
D E
O
OPTIMIZER
MIC
YPAO
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
A/B/C/D/E
F
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
EDIT
P
VIDEO
L
R
ZONE 3
AUDIO
ZONE 2
TUNING
MODE
OPTICAL
ZONE CONTROLS
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
ZONE ON/OFF
FM/AM
VIDEO AUX
PRESET/
TUNING
H I J K
MULTI ZONE
S VIDEO
PRESET/TUNING
G
SLEEP
L
Q
M
GE
RX-V1800
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
■ Front panel/Face avant/Frontblende/Frontpanelen/Voorpaneel/Фронтальная панель/Pannello anteriore/
Panel delantero
The circled numbers and alphabets correspond to those in the Owner’s Manual.
Les nombres et lettres dans un cercle correspondent à ceux du mode d’emploi.
Die umkreisten Zahlen und Buchstaben entsprechen denen in der Bedienungsanleitung.
Inringade nummer och bokstäver motsvarar de som anges i bruksanvisningen.
De omcirkelde cijfers en letters corresponderen met die in de Gebruiksaanwijzing.
Цифры и буквы в кружках относятся к цифрам и буквам в Инструкции по эксплуатации.
I manuali e le lettere dell’alfabeto corrispondono a quelli nel Manuale di istruzioni.
Los números y las letras en el interior de círculos se corresponden con aquellos del manual de instrucciones.
00_sheet_RX-V1800_GE.book Page 1 Friday, June 15, 2007 9:29 PM
00_sheet_RX-V1800_GE.book Page i Friday, June 15, 2007 9:29 PM
■ Remote control/Boîtier de télécommande/Fernbedienung/Fjärrkontrollen/
Afstandsbediening/Пульт ДУ/Telecomando/Mando a distancia
O P
1
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
STANDBY
POWER
AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
TUNER
CD
CD-R
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
DVD
BD/HD DVD
PHONO
DTV/CBL
DVR
VCR
V-AUX/DOCK
SELECT
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
SOURCE
TV MUTE
2
LEVEL
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
MENU
SRCH MODE
3
A
B
C
D
MUTE
TITLE
8
9
0
TV
SET MENU
BAND
7
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO
ENTER
E
F
G
M
A/B/C/D/E
4
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
3
H
I
SYSTEM MEMORY
2
1
3
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
5
CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN
5
7
6
MOVIE
5
6
7
MOVIE
8
8
STEREO ENHANCER
STEREO ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
6
4
4
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
+ 10
ENT
MODE – PTY SEEK – START
J
K
0
9
N
REC
DISC SKIP
OFF
ON
MACRO
LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
L
Printed in Malaysia
WK69410
Download PDF
Similar pages